Home

Model KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX

1. 344 DISA Silence Detection P V RE EE 344 DISA Continuous Signal Detection Ia 8l nennen nnn 344 DISA Cyclic Signal Detection 47 7 aucune intanto ette tu aha eege SES eege eeh 344 Caller ID Signal NPE A90 P aiei 345 Pay Tone Signal Type 491 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 345 Prodr UM e E 346 MUNK Group Number D00 RE 346 RS PLA POT E 346 Trunk Call Duration Limitation 502 346 Call Transiter to Trunk EE 346 Call Forwarding to Trunk 504 346 Executive Busy Override 502 347 Executive Busy Override Deny ISO 347 DND Override KEE 347 Account Code Mode 508 EE 347 TRS Barring Level for System Speed Dialling 509 347 TRS Barring Level for Extension Lock 510 347 NESS gt c R 347 Permission for Door Ope
2. 328 Idle Line Access Local Access EI enisctensccnarecadencctcantencnaanenedneavasainde yexncnetscnnedeqdeeaeccneneddenacinemhenpsues 329 System Password for Administrator for PT Programming 110 329 System Password for User for PT Programming I111l 329 Manager Password 112 E atdet 329 venned Code 120 EE 329 Vened Code Ein CR KEE 329 Verified Code Personal Identification Number PIN 722 329 Verified Code COS Number 123 330 Decimal Point Position for Currency 130 330 ee A EE 330 Main Processing MPR Software Version Reference TOo0 330 MME Programming EE EE SEE RENE 331 Aold Recall Time Per 331 Niciei ga ceNi 2 101 331 Jace Ze OR TIME 203 c 331 Hot Line Waiting Time 204 E 331 Automatic Redial Repeat Times DO 331 Automatic Redial Interval DO 331 Door Open Duration Tie PO E 331 Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT 208 332 DISA Delayed Answer Time 209
3. gt 3 Internal Call Block 32 Incoming Call Indication Features 34 Incoming Call Indication Features SUMMARY 34 Ring TONE Pattern Re EE 35 e EVI m EEE 36 Receiving Group MT 38 Idle Extension Hunting EE 38 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features 40 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY 40 Croup ANDES 44 OPE e E 47 VP S 49 Overtlow Feature 50 Beie Zelle Oe EEE EEE EE EE 52 VEN rm M H SE 54 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 56 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 56 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY 56 CA Forwarding FWD D 59 BON DENN AE 63 PAIS WOTING FealllleS ed 64 Answering ENEE 64 Answering Features GUMMAY 64 LING gt gt lt Le ue Le DE 65 CAM PEUP re See 66 Willen Ee TEE 67 Making
4. 332 DISA Trunk to Trunk Call Prolong Time 210 332 DISA Intercept Time 21 332 TRS Barring ARS Programmmg 333 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 32001 333 TRS Barring Denied Code 301 333 TRS Barring Exception Code 202 333 Special Carrier Access Code 303 333 Emergency ido EN EEEN RENARE RENERE 333 ARS Oe 600 EE 333 ARS TENNE 334 ARS Routing Plan Table Number 22721 334 ARS Exception Number 325 Lavvo ted 334 ARS Routing Plan Time Table 330 irensten aaar eisai aE i 334 ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 331 346 335 ARG Carrier Name 350 335 ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access T3bil nnns 335 ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access 35721 335 ARS Carrier Access Code 353 M 335 TONK FOD ITIN e EEE E 336 LCOT BRI Trunk Connection 400
5. 111 Automatic Route Selection AH 111 Conversation Features EEN 116 Hanos Tee ee RS 116 eaedem Tre 117 pi c Hm 118 Headset ele A 119 DALE SUN 120 Flash Recall Terminate EE 121 External Feature Access EEA nennen nennen nnn nnn nn 122 Trunk Call 123 Parallelled Telephone 124 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 127 NANSEN dite RT 128 CT 128 Holding FEAT ee cc lC 130 e iN e Gl MR T UT 130 EP PERCENT U 132 92 Me r 133 MEN 134 Conference Features sscicehecccesecs ace cecaccwccawisadavdccedpcounticueacceawsaduamacectwoasGomdawsacnnencce 135 Conference FE Kl 135 Conference Features SUMMARY EE 135 Eo EN e EEE SE eebe 136 deg TEE 138 Paging I TT 139 Feature Guide 7 8 14 1 15 15 1 15 2 15 3 15 4 15 5 15 6 16 16 1 16 2 17 17 1 17 2 18 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 4 19 19 1 19 1 1 19 1 2 19 1 3 19 1 4 19 1 5 19 1 6 19 1 7 19 1 8 19 1 9 19 1 10 19 1 11 20 20 1 1 21 1 21 1 1 22 1 22 1 1 22 2 1 22 3 1 23 1 23 1 1 23 2 1 23 3 1 23 4 1 23 5 1 24 1 24 1 1 24 2
6. 351 Feature Guide 11 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 625 351 Je 351 Destination When All BUSY LE 351 Queung Call Capacity E 352 Queuing Hurry up Level 629 352 dueuing ime Ee EE 352 Sequences in Queuing Time Table len 352 Maximum Number of Agents 1622 352 User Groups of a Paging Group IGaA0 nnne 353 External Pagers of a Paging Group 641 nnne 353 User Groups of a Pickup Group IGbO nnns 353 VM Group Floating Extension Number Tee 354 Idle Extension Hunting Type 680 BE 354 Idle Extension Hunting Group Member IG 354 PEPSI Needle 355 Po Termina nO EE 355 Personal Identification Number PIN for PS Registration 692 356 CS Status Reference 699 beet 356 3 3 9 Resource Interface rogrammmg 357 External Pager Floating Extension Number oO01 357 Music Source Selection for BGM with the KX TDA30 BGMe with the KX TDA100 KX TD
7. e 3 Total Charge 00175 95 CO Line 001 00194 00 002 00073 00 003 00161 00 004 00033 00 e e k 3 Charge Meter Print Out All Extensions Yokckck ck c ce ck ck c e e e x 3 Extension amp Verified Code 775 00194 00 102 00073 00 776 00161 00 lt Verified Code 104 00194 00 105 00073 00 106 00161 00 107 00033 00 Note XXX Call Charge Fee Reference for a verified code XXX verified code 232 Feature Guide 1 24 Administrative Information Output Features Conditions General e Call Charge Fee Reference by Charge Reference Button A display telephone user can check the total call charge for his own extension using the Charge Reference button A flexible button can be customised as the Charge Reference button Pay Tone Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only e tis possible to select whether the PBX starts counting the call charge from when the PBX detects the answer signal from the telephone company e Itis possible to enable the PBX to send the flash recall signal to the tele
8. les it Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 730 Feature Guide 151 1 15 Optional Device Features Flowchart A DISA call from an outside party is received Is there an idle port on the MSG cards VES DISA Delayed Answer Time Time out Does the trunk group that received the call employ Intercept cal Routing Busy DND The PBX answers the A gt DISA Mute Time Yes Time out Y The outgoing message OGM plays and The call is routed to the intercept The call is routed the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling destination to the operator Intercept Routing rm mm mm vm vm mm mm m F No Destination No Is the first digit dialled DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept Time out Yes The call is routed to the Operator Intercept Routing No Destination The outgoing message OGM stops Goes to C DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA Time out No Is the second digit dialled Yes No Is the first dialled digit assigned a destination for the DISA AA service The PBX receives the following dialled digits and checks the dialled number What is the DISA security mode Continued to the next page Yes The call is routed to the destination 152 Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features Continued from the previous page No Security Trun
9. 360 External Modem Control 801 360 MDR Pade BNP 360 SMDR Skip Perforation 803 361 SMDR Outgoing Call Printing 804 nennen nnne 36 SMDR Incoming Call Printing TIONAL 361 Remote Programming 810 anernnnnnernnnnervnnnvnvnnnvrvnnnennunnennnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnennnnnernnnnnennunnennunnennnnne 361 Modem Floating Extension Number To 361 ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Toi72 nnn 361 3 3 11 Card Programming 362 Slot Card Type Reference 900 362 Slot Card De lellon 90 362 Slot Card Reset 902 M ae oe see nee eo ene ne eye eee eee ee 362 OPB3 Option Card Type Reference 910 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 on 362 OPB3 Option Card Deletion 911 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 362 4 APPEN te 4 1 Capacity of System Resources 364 4 1 1 Capacity of System Resources nennen nnne
10. 336 LCOT BRI Trunk Name 401 REE 336 LCOT BRI Trunk Group Number RE 336 LCOT BRI Trunk Number Reference 409 337 Feature Guide 3 3 7 3 3 8 LCOT Dialling Mode E ae arna 337 LOOT Pulse OE 337 LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration LW712l 338 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time OQutgoing I 12l 338 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time lncoming 414 338 LGOT Reverse ere El e RE 339 LCOT Pause Time 416 seeeelssseeeeseseseseeeeee nennen nnne mnn nnns nennen nn nsns nnne 339 LGOT Flasn Hecall TIME 417 EE 339 L COT Disconnect Time IA18 nennen nennen nennen nnne nnns 340 BRLNetwork Type 420 EE EE o i iei aeia 340 BRI DIL DDI MSN Selection J42 340 BRI Subscriber Number 422 341 BRI Layer 1 Active dee OH EE 341 BAI Layer 2 Active ee E EE 341 BRI Configuration EE 342 PTE PN 342 DIL 1 1 DNA 343 DID NUMDEr JAS EEE EN 343 PUD INCA E EE 343 DID Destination 453 E 343 Trunk Group Intercept Destination 470 343 Host PBX Access Code 471 BE 344 Extension to Trunk Call Duration IA 2l 344 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 473
11. 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt Group Call Group Call Distribution UCD Priority Hunting Priority Hunting ICD Group button Ring Any telephone All UCD Priority Hunting Ring Delayed Ringing for PTs and SLTs is not available Group Call Waiting Capable Distribution Method Telephone PTIPS with idie lt KX TDA30 gt Group Call Group Call Group Call Waiting Capable Waiting Mode Distribution Method Distribution Method Telephone Distribution PT PS with idle Priority Hunting Priority Hunting ICD Group button Not available Any telephone All UCD Priority Hunting Ring Ring Incoming calls enter the queue immediately Member extensions do not receive the Call Waiting tone Example e Group Call Waiting mode All All extensions hear the Call e Group call distribution method a for idle extensions UCD Waiting tone Ring ICD Group Button for Group Call Waiting The way that the Group Call Waiting feature works depends on the Group Call Waiting Distribution method as follows a Ring The Group Call Waiting feature activates for all busy member extensions even when the extensions do not have ICD Group buttons simultaneously for only one incoming call additional calls will wait in a queue b UCD Priority Hunting The Group Call Waiting feature activates on an idle ICD Group button located on busy me
12. 2 Call Charge Display Upto 7 digits e g 88888 75 The decimal point position the number of significant decimal digits for currency is programmable Decimal Point Position for Currency 130 Up to 3 currency characters are programmable e g EUR or for Euro Currency 131 The currency position either front or back of the call charge is programmable e g 45 12 or 45 12 3 Margin Tax Rate Assignment It is possible to add a margin Charge Margin 010 and the tax Charge Tax 011 to the call charges The call charge rate per meter indication is programmable on a trunk group basis Charge Rate per Unit 012 Calculation Method The margin or tax rate must be xx xx whole number part two digits decimal fraction two digits A calculation method depends on the information which is sent from the telephone company meter indication or charge a Call charge with tax and margin in meter indication Meter indication received from the telephone company x Call Charge Rate 1 Tax Rate x 1 Margin Rate 0 b Call charge with tax and margin in charge Charge received from the telephone company x Call Charge Rate 1 Tax Rate x 1 Margin Rate The calculation result is rounded up to the least significant decimal digit Feature Guide 231 1 24 Administrative Information Output Features 4 Total Call Charge APT user
13. 2 3 1 PC Programming Quick Setup display will appear automatically The following items can be programmed as desired em Parameter serpin Date amp Time Set System Password for Installer Operator amp Manager Flexible Numbering Type Operator Local Access Remote Maintenance Number Year Month The date and time set on the PC will be used Date Hour Minute 4 10 characters Enter the system password for installer Extension Assign the PBX operator to all time modes day lunch Number break night gt 2 2 5 Operator Features The extension assigned as the PBX operators is automatically allowed to perform manager operation 2 2 6 Manager Features 1 Pattern 1 If Pattern 1 with X is selected X must prefix all with x feature numbers except access numbers when an 2 Pattern 2 extension user wants to use a feature without X Example Call Pickup feature number Pattern 1 with X x41 Pattern 2 without X 41 For default of the flexible numbers refer to the Flexible Numbering Table available while a dial tone is heard 2 3 5 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 1 0 9 The feature numbers for Operator Call and Idle Line 2 9 0 Access can be selected They will be 0 or 9 Hemote Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX Maintenance Dial including the country code When necessary this Number number will be used to access the PBX from a remote l
14. Carifame gt E 01 11 Reference onl ENTER d HOLD Slot Card Deletion 901 901 gt gt aal Deel gt KI ENTER 01 11 Confirming the ENTER END deleting operation To the Next Slot No To the Desired Slot No ENTER CANCEL NEXT Slot Card Reset 902 902 gt er Slotno gt Reset gt er 01 11 Confirming the END ENTER resetting operation ENTER OPB3 Option Card Type Reference 910 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 910 gt Q gt Slot No 1 gt Card No gt Option Card Type gt E END ENTER 01 11 1 3 Reference only OPB3 Option Card Deletion 911 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 911 gt e gt SitNo gt EE Eh iiie 01 11 Confirming the END ENTER deleting operation ENTER 362 Feature Guide Section 4 Appendix Feature Guide 363 4 1 Capacity of System Resources 4 1 Capacity of System Resources 0 lt i Q u O C Ke Category KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Absent Message 1 x 16 characters 1 x 16 characters 1 x 16 characters Extension extn extn extn Incoming Call 64 32 extensions 64 32 extensions 64 32 extensions Distribution Group group group group PS Ring Group 32 VM DPT Group 1 VPS x 8 ch 2 VPSs x 24 ch 2 VPSs x 24 ch 64 Idle Extension Hunting 64 16 extensions 64 16 extensions 64 16 extensions group group group Message Waiting 256 2 0 4 0 lt EE D 8 Z 3 D Extensi
15. am sorry I cannot take your call right now Please leave a message and I will call you back i The caller leaves a message If the call reroutes to the floating extension number of the VM DTMF Group or the extension in the VM DTMF group by such as the FWD feature when the VPS answers the call the PBX will dial the mailbox number of the corresponding group or extension and any other digits required to the VPS automatically using the caller dialled number Follow on ID In this case the caller can reach a mailbox without knowing the mailbox number Available Features for Follow on ID a FWD to a Mailbox b Intercept Routing to a Mailbox C Call Transfer to a Mailbox d Listening to a Message in a Mailbox Automated Attendant AA Service Mode The VPS greets and guides the caller to the desired extension directly without operator assistance VM AA Service AA VM Service It is possible to switch the service mode assigned on the VPS port from the VM service to AA service or vice versa System Explanation 1 Service Mode Assignment Assign the service mode VM service or AA service to the VM DTMF group to Feature Guide 203 1 22 Voice Mail Features 204 correspond with the assignment of the VPS 2 DTMF Command Assignment Assign the DTMF command to suit the VPS settings Command Default Switching to VM 6 Switching to AA 8 Recording message Listening message Note H Mail
16. Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 PBX 1 modifies the call adds the Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and sends the call to PBX 2 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 01 23 4567 252 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features lt PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code gt Telephone Company TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 952 9 01 23 4567 i JE Extn 1011 Outside Party Extn 1011 01 23 4567 eremum d Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 PBX 1 modifies the call adds 952 and the Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and sends the call to PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 01 23 4567 Feature Guide 253 1 27 Networking Features c Blocking of Trunk Call through Other PBXs and How to Override It To prohibit a TIE line call to go through PBX 2 for making a trunk call if PBX 2 is Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX e g KX TDA100 or KX TDA200 PBX 2 should disable the trunk group of the outgoing call from PBX 2 against the COS of the trunk group of the i
17. Like the XDP mode each telephone can act as a completely different extension with its own extension number In addition to a slave DPT the master DPT connected to a super hybrid port can have an SLT in parallel or XDP mode APT DPT SLT PBX per sr Extn 101 Extn 101 rar Extn 102 Extn 102 DPT SLT Extn 101 Extn 105 PBX DPT DPT PBX Master Slave EE Extn 101 Extn 201 DPT DPT SLT Master Slave Extn 101 Extn 201 SLT Extn 101 in Parallel Mode or Extn 105 in XDP Mode 1 10 Conversation Features Features Descriptions Connections Wireless For this connection refer to the Wireless XDP XDP Parallel Parallel mode feature 1 23 5 Wireless XDP Mode Parallel Mode APT DPT SLT PS Extn 101 Extn 101 I I I I I I I I T I I I I Extn 102 Extn 102 Conditions APT SLT e If one telephone goes off hook while the other is on a call a three party call is established If one user goes on hook the other user continues the call e An extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is playing background music BGM receiving a paging announcement over the built in speaker e The SLT will always ring for incoming calls if its ringer is turned on It cannot be programmed to not ring DPT SLT e When in the parallel mode the XDP mode of the hybrid extension port should be of
18. Main Processing MPR Software Version Reference 190 190 gt e gt END ENTER Reference only Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 4 Time Programming Hold Recall Time 200 200 gt gt Gm gt le gt 0 240 END ENTER ENTER HOLD Transfer Recall Time 201 201 gt er Time gt r END ENTER ER ENTER Intercept Time 203 203 gt e rime gt gt 23 1 240 s ENTER ENTER Hot Line Waiting Time 204 204 gt er Time rer 0 15 s END ENTER ENTER Automatic Redial Repeat Times 205 205 gt e Gumbercttimes gt e gt 0 15 END ENTER ENTER Automatic Redial Interval 206 206 gt er Time gt er 53 1 120 x10 s ENTER ENTER END Door Open Duration Time 207 207 gt e Dei e KM ENTER ete ENTER ST Feature Guide 331 3 3 PT Programming Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT 208 208 gt gt Time gt gt DD 0 60 5 END ENTER ENTER DISA Delayed Answer Time 209 209 gt e Gime gt m F END ENTER ENTER DISA Trunk to Trunk Call Prolong Time 210 210 gt e Dei e KI gm END ENTER EL ENTER DISA Intercept Time 211 211 gt gt Gm gt O gt Cz ENTER gt ENTER ST 332 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 5 TRS Barring ARS Programming TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 300 D 300 Qo gt SELECT gt cQ DJ
19. Receiving Whisper OHCA 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 3 5 Using the ANSWER RELEASE Button 1 4 8 Using the Headset Headset Operation 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 119 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 5 Data Line Security Description Once Data Line Security is set on an extension communication between the extension and the other party is protected from signals such as Call Waiting Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override Extension which has data devices connected e g fax machine may set this feature to maintain secure data transmission against tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication User Manual References User Manual 1 7 9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones Data Line Security 120 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 6 Flash Recall Terminate Description The FLASH RECALL button Flash Recall mode or Terminate mode or Terminate button Terminate mode is used when a PT user disconnects the current call and originates another call without hanging up first It performs as going on hook and then going off hook Explanation of Each Mode Flash Recall Mode Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone from the line used last For example if a trunk call is disconnected the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the telep
20. e Each trunk has its service type public private or VPN Select VPN to use this service through system programming Feature Guide 261 1 27 Networking Features e Even if the telephone company does not support the VPN service it is possible to use the same kind of service when making a call by TIE line service programming and or Quick Dialling programming 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling Quick Dialling Programming Example Location No Quick Dialling No Quick Dialling 01 2345 extension no of 9 123 4321 Public no of other PBX extension 2345 Explanation When an extension user dials 2345 he is connected to extension 2345 of other PBX whose public number is 123 4321 Feature Guide References 1 27 1 TIE Line Service 262 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features 1 27 3 QSIG Network 1 27 3 1 QSIG Network SUMMARY Description QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN Q 931 and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network The QSIG network supports private communications by the TIE line service method Each ISDN QSIG connection must have a master port on one Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX and a slave port on the other Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX to establish a QSIG network Connection Example Extn 2000 Extn 1000 JE JEF A Master Extn 2999 Extn 1999 JE B Master B Slave C Master Extn 3000 ut Extn 3999 System programming controls the follo
21. 602 gt e Emm Espl gt ore END ENTER EES 01 64 ENTER Feature Guide 349 3 3 PT Programming User Group 603 603 gt e gt No UserGroupNo gt er OD pre T END EISE 1 4 digits 001 032 ENTE Extension Intercept Destination 604 604 gt CO Time No gt Exin No Destination No gt gt EI 1 Day 2 Lunch 1 4 digits Max 32 digits END ENTER 3 Break 4 Night ENTER Call Forwarding No Answer Time 605 605 gt C gt Extn No gt Time gt r 1 4 digits 0 120 s END ENTER ENTER CLIP COLP Number 606 606 gt gt Eni s l gt 1 4 digits Max 16 digits END ENTER ENTER Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 620 620 gt o Incoming Call gt Extn No gt gt Distribution mE 1 4 digits ENTER Group No 01 64 gt gt G gt DD END ENTER Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing 621 621 e Incoming Call Distribution 01 32 Immediate ENTER Group No 1 6 rings No ring gt Q E END ENTER 350 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 622 Incoming Call 622 Distribution Ezio gt r EI ENTER Group No 01 64 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 623 Incoming Call 623 gt Q gt Distribution ENTER Group No 01 64 Incom
22. ANI Automatic Number Identification AOC Advice of Charge APT Analogue Proprietary Telephone ARS Automatic Route Selection B BGM Background Music BRI Basic Rate Interface C CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CF Call Forwarding by ISDN CLI Calling Line Identification CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction CNIP Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIR Calling Name Identification Restriction COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction CONP Connected Name Identification Presentation CONR Connected Name Identification Restriction COS Class of Service CPC Calling Party Control CS Cell Station CT Call Transfer by ISDN CTI Computer Telephony Integration D DDI Direct Dialling In DID Direct Inward Dialling DIL Direct In Line DISA Direct Inward System Access DND Do Not Disturb DPT Digital Proprietary Telephone DSS Direct Station Selection DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency List of Abbreviations E EFA External Feature Access F FWD gt Call Forwarding G G CO Group CO ICD Incoming Call Distribution IRNA Intercept Routing No Answer ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network L L CO Loop CO LCS Live Call Screening LED Light Emitting D
23. Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP The PBX can send a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when an extension user makes a call The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP The PBX sends a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when the extension user answers an incoming call The caller can see the number of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 092 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP supplementary service ETS 300 097 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP supplementary service CLIP Example 1 Dials 2 12345678 87654321 is displayed PBX Caller Called party CLIP COLP No 12345678 CLIP COLP No 87654321 COLP Example 1 Dials SUE Called party 111222333 g Je CLIP COLP No 111222333 PBX a MN FWD IRNA etc 88 Answering party 3 111222444 Mpeg No is displayed 2 Answers the call Feature Guide 181 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 182 CLIP COLP Number The telephone numbers sent to the network for CLIP COLP can be assigned as follows e CLIP COLP number for each ISDN port subscribers number BRI Subscriber Number 422 For BRI only
24. Incoming calls are distributed using one of the following methods Uniform Call Calls go to a different extension uniformly each time a call Distribution UCD is received Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched in the specified order All extensions in the incoming call distribution group ring simultaneously 2 Queuing Feature 1 2 2 3 Queuing Feature If a preprogrammed numbers of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy a preprogrammed number of additional calls can wait in a queue While calls are waiting in the queue an outgoing message OGM or Music on Hold can be sent to the waiting callers 3 VIP Call 1 2 2 4 VIP Call It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups so that an incoming Feature Guide 41 1 2 Receiving Group Features call can be received from the groups in priority order 4 Overflow Feature 1 2 2 5 Overflow Feature A call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination when it cannot be answered or queued Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group It is also possible to send busy tone Busy on Busy or disconnect the line 5 Incoming Call Distribution Group Controlling Feature omme en Log in Log out Member extensions can join the group to 1 2 2 6 Log handle calls Log in or leave the group in Log out for a break Log out They can leave the group temporarily when they are away
25. The PBX waits for a preprogrammed time period Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT 208 between the end of dialling and start of the SMDR timer for outgoing trunk calls When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires the PBX starts counting the call A display PT shows the elapsed time of the call Feature Guide 229 1 24 Administrative Information Output Features The starting time and the total duration of the call are recorded on SMDR If the reverse signal detection has been set 1 5 4 5 Reverse Circuit the PBX will start counting the call after detecting the reverse signal from the telephone company regardless of the above timer e Serial Interface RS 232C Parameters The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface RS 232C port RS 232C Parameter New Line Code 800 RS 232C Parameter Baud Rate 800 RS 232C Parameter Word Length 800 RS 232C Parameter Parity Bit 800 RS 232C Parameter Stop Bit Length 800 a New Line Code Select the code for the PC or printer If the PC or printer automatically feeds lines with carriage return select CR If not select CR LF b Baud Rate A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the PBX to the PC or printer C Word Length A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character d Parity Bit A parity code indicates what type of parity i
26. gt gt CI ENTER 02 04 01 02 00 63 for Fix ENTER END Clear for Automatic Note This programme needs Slot Card Reset 902 to enable after setting 342 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming DIL 1 1 Destination 450 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 450 gt 8 acte ge ee Destination No gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch 01 10 01 16 1 5 digit ENTER 3 Break 4 Night SZ gt gt gt EJ END ENTER KX TDA30 450 gt L gt gt Time No gt gt gt Destination No gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch 02 04 01 04 1 5 digit ENTER 3 Break 4 Night E gt gt lt gt EJ END ENTER DID Number 451 451 gt e Location DDN 9 iai END ENTER 0001 1000 Max 32 digits ENTER DID Name 452 452 gt 8 gt LecationNo gt Deel gt gt END ENTER 0001 1000 Max 20 characters ENTER DID Destination 453 453 gt e Time No Location No gt OestinationNo gt e gt 1 Day 2 Lunch 2 E dini END ENTER 3Break 4 Night 0001 1000 1 5 digits ENTER Trunk Group Intercept Destination 470 470 gt G gt gt Trunk Group No gt gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch 01 64 Max 32 digit ENTER 3 Break 4 Night kk A E END ENTER Feature Guide 343 3 3 PT Programming Host PBX Access Code 471 471 gt gt Frurk Groupe Locsiono ENTER UR 2 rr Host PBX Access Code gt Q gt C END Max 10 digits ENTER
27. 111 gt Q gt Password gt r END 4 10 digits ENTER 1234 ENTER Manager Password 112 112 gt ee Password gt er DD 4 10 digits END ENTER 01234 ENTER Verified Code 120 120 re gt gt Verified Code gt amp DO 0001 1000 1 4 digits END ENTER ENTER Verified Code Name 121 121 gt e gt Weier gt Nam gt gt m 0001 1000 Max 20 characters END ENTER ENTER Verified Code Personal Identification Number PIN 122 122 gt e Location No gt PIN gt er 0001 1000 Max 10 digits END ENTER ENTER WARNING When a third party discovers the personal identification number PIN verified code PIN extension PIN of the PBX there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls Feature Guide 329 3 3 PT Programming 330 using the telephone line and the cost will be charged to your own account In order to avoid this problem we strongly recommend the following points a Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN b Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it c Change the PIN frequently Verified Code COS Number 123 123 gt er Location No gt 005 0 gt er 0001 1000 01 64 END ENTER ENTER Decimal Point Position for Currency 130 130 gt gt gt gt 0 7 END ENTER ENTER Currency 131 131 gt e gt Er gt gt ENTER 3 characters ENTER END
28. 1234 ENTER ENTER CS Status Reference 699 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 699 gt e gt SlotNo gt Porno gt Tsstaus gt E ENTER 01 11 01 08 Reference only END KX TDA30 699 gt er gt gt CSStatus gt ENTER 01 07 01 08 Reference only END 356 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 9 Resource Interface Programming External Pager Floating Extension Number 700 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 700 gt pel gt ENTER is in ENTER HOLD To the Next Pager No To the Desired Pager No v NEXT CANCEL KX TDA30 700 gt gt gt Enno gt er m 4 dioi END ENTER TOMUS ENTER HOLD Music Source Selection for BGM with the KX TDA30 BGM2 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 710 CD 710 gt gt et gt O gt C3 MESSAGE ND External Internal1 Internal2 ENTER ENTER Music on Hold 711 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 711 gt e gt Music Source No gt e ENTER EECH ENTER zum KX TDA30 711 gt G gt gt gt LJ ENTER peer ENTER zii Music for Transfer 712 712 gt r gt O L3 Hold Musi END ENTER Ring back ENTER Feature Guide 357 3 3 PT Programming Doorphone Call Destination 720 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 720 gt e gt Time No gt Slot No gt Card No and Port No gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch 01 11 1 3 1 4 ENTER 3 Break 4 Night gt gt Destination No gt Gr Max 32 digi
29. 720 358 Doorphone Number Reference 729 358 E E1 Line Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 195 E1 Line Service Features KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 195 EFA gt External Feature Access EFA 122 Electronic Station Lockout gt Extension Lock 106 Emergency Call 72 Emergency Number 304 333 Entering Characters 322 Entering System Programming Mode 321 Exception Code Tables 100 Exclusive Call Hold 130 Executive Busy Override 93 Executive Busy Override 505 347 Executive Busy Override Deny 93 Executive Busy Override Deny 506 9347 Feature Guide 373 Index Extension Controlling Features 234 Extension Feature Clear 236 Extension Intercept Destination 604 Extension Lock 106 Extension Name 004 326 Extension Number 003 325 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 234 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 005 Extension PIN Lock 234 Extension Port Configuration 276 Extension Programming 349 Extension to Trunk Call Duration 123 Extension to Trunk Call Duration 472 External Feature Access EFA 122 External Modem Control 801 360 External Pager Floating Extension Number 700 350 326 344 357 External Pagers of a Paging Group 641 353 EXtra Device Port XDP 276 EXtra Device Port XDP Mode 600 349 F Fault Recovery Diagnostics 307 Feature Guide References 2 Feature Highlights 4 Fixed Buttons 167 Flash Recall Terminate 121 Flexible Buttons 170 Flexible
30. AUTO ANS MESSAGE END ENTER Disable Enable ENTER HOLD TRS Barring Denied Code 301 301 gt er Level No gt Location No gt Denied Code gt gt 553 END 2 6 001 100 Max 16 digits ENTER ENTER To the Next Location No To the Desired Location No NEXT CANCEL TRS Barring Exception Code 302 302 gt lt gt Level No Location No Exception Code gt e gt E iai END ENTER 2 6 001 100 Max 16 digits ENTER Special Carrier Access Code 303 303 gt eer gt Carrier Access Code gt gt ID 01 20 Max 16 digits END ENTER ENTER Emergency Number 304 304 gt Q gt Emergency No gt gt IT E idi END ENTER 01 10 Max 32 digits ENTER ARS Mode 320 3220 99 gt C3 Off ldle Line ENTER All Access ENTER Feature Guide 333 3 3 PT Programming ARS Leading Number 321 321 gt Q9 gt Location No gt LeadingNo gt E 0001 1000 Max 16 digits END ENTER ENTER ARS Routing Plan Table Number 322 322 gt O gt gt Plan Table No gt r END 0001 1000 01 16 ENTER ENTER ARS Exception Number 325 325 gt 89 gt ocaion No Exception gt gt E ENTER 001 200 Max 16 digits ENTER END ARS Routing Plan Time Table 330 In 12 hour Format 330 gt PanTabieo gt DayNo gt ARSTimeNo gt gt 01 16 0 Sun 1 Mon 2 Tue 1 TimeA 2 TimeB ENT
31. Accumulation Value Clear Accumulation value total incoming calls total overflowed calls lost calls average queuing time can be cleared manually The date and time of clearing is saved and it is shown on the display monitoring starting date and time When the value exceeds 999989 before clearing will be shown If a call to an incoming call distribution group is overflowed If the display is in idle status it will change to monitor mode for the corresponding incoming call distribution group automatically If the display is monitoring another incoming call distribution group it will not change Other Features while in Monitor Mode The supervisor extension can use other features making calls pressing the MESSAGE button etc even while in monitor mode When each operation is finished his telephone returns to the queue monitor display User Manual References User Manual 1 8 2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor Feature Guide 55 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 56 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Description When an extension user cannot answer calls e g busy not at the desk it is possible to forward or refuse the calls using the following
32. Description Virtual Private Network VPN is a service provided by the telephone company It uses an existing line as if it were a private line There is no need to set up a private line or to lease a line from the telephone company Making and receiving both public and private calls is possible using the same line Public Private Discrimination a When making a call The public private discrimination number is required before sending the dialled number to the telephone company The public private discrimination number can be dialled manually or automatically by ARS programming gt 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS and or TIE line service programming b When receiving a call The telephone company distinguishes the call type If it is a private call the call is received by the TIE line service method If it is a public call the call is received by the Incoming Trunk Call Distribution method DIL DDI MSN which is assigned on the trunk Example Public ISDN lt Public Discrimination gt 4 0 01 23 4567 T Public No Dials Private IPBX A Discrimination PBX 2 Head Te Branch Branch y Extn 201 Extn 202 Extn 301 Extn 302 Extn 401 Extn 402 DDI No 01 45 6789 01 45 6789 1 PBX 3 PBX Code 113 nmm OTI Dials 9 01 23 4567 Dials 401 ARS TIE Note Public Call gt Private Call Conditions
33. ETS 300 261 Call transfer supplementary service If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the transferred call the following situation will be possible Example a tte I9 Extension 1000 of PBX 1 dials extension number 2000 and the call is sent to extension 2000 of PBX 2 through QSIG network lt m mo lt ees pe a SS ee r o mm lt 2 Transferred to 1001 G The call is transferred from extension 2000 to extension 1001 of PBX 1 ra mc Extn 1000 Extn 1001 Extn 2000 The call between PBX 1 and PBX 2 is released and the Dials 2000 A call is connected directly to mm thetransfer destination of extension 2000 Extn 1000 Extn 1001 Extn 2000 E imm Se ei Se SEES SEE ph ag a SER le A ie EE ae ite d m e bie pi pe pr il Conditions e This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN QSIG port basis e Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible gt 1 11 1 Call Transfer Feature Guide 269 1 27 Networking Features User Manual References User Manual 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer 270 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features 1 27 3 5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG Description If the call has been made to an extension in another PBX in QSIG network and the called party is busy an exte
34. Extensions are hunted in a circular way in the UCD preprogrammed order for the group starting at the extension after the extension which received the last call Extn Extn Extn y Extn Received Starts searching from the last call extn B Skips extn A Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched for using the preprogrammed order for the group 1st Priority 2nd Priority 3rd Extn Extn Extn Extn Em gt ES gt ES gt Always starts searching from the first assigned extension Ring All extensions in the group ring simultaneously Delayed Ringing Delayed ringing or no ringing can be programmed for each extension in the group Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing 621 The call can be answered by pressing the flashing button even if no ring or a delayed time is set Extn Extn Extn Extn A B C D Rings immediately simultaneously Delayed Ringing Rings after a specified time delay 44 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Call Waiting for Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Call Waiting When there are no available extensions in an incoming call distribution group the group members can receive the Call Waiting tone To use this feature e Select the Group Call Waiting mode through system programming This determines the distribution method for waiting calls e Member extensions must assign the Call Waiting mode individually or they will not be notified
35. Follows the system assignment of the music source for the Music on Hold Music on Hold 711 Conditions e Tenant to Tenant Call Block The following features can be restricted based on the COS for each extension not based on the tenant by the Internal Call Block feature 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block Calling extensions or doorphone s in the restricted tenant s Picking up calls ringing in the restricted tenant s Retrieving a call held within the restricted tenant s Example Tenant 2 Tenant 1 JE JE NN Extn 108 Extn oi em cos 5 cos 6 i l Extension Groupp El fi Extn 110 Extn 111 Feature Guide 283 2 2 System Configuration Software 284 Feature Guide Programming Example Called Party LL ee CE be fv 5 v v v v v v v v IL pellet Leier p Block Explanation 1 Assign each extension in a tenant to a certain COS number Each tenant must have unique COS numbers Tenant 1 COS 1 and COS 2 Tenant 2 COS 3 and COS 4 Tenant 3 COS 5 and COS 6 2 Tenant to Tenant Call Block enables by the Internal Call Block feature a Tenant 1 COS 1 and COS 2 can make calls to both Tenant 2 COS 3 and COS 4 and Tenant 3 COS 5 and COS 6 as well as Tenant 1 b Tenant 2 COS 3 and COS 4 can make calls to Tenant 1 COS 1 and COS 2 and Tenant 2 C Tenant 3 COS 5 and COS 6 can m
36. However one PBX supports up to 16 simultaneous programmers one system programmer 15 personal programmers one manager programmer 15 personal programmers or 16 personal programmers e System Programming Password Level To access system programming a valid password must be entered There are two types of passwords which are set at the factory and can be changed through system programming System Password All system programming available for PT programming is for Administrator accessible gt System Password for Administrator for PT for PT Programming Programming 110 System Password Permitted system programming is accessible System for User for PT Password for User for PT Programming 111 Each access to Programming system programming can be controlled e Personal Programming Data Default Set A user can return all of the items programmed on the telephone to default Feature Guide References 2 2 6 Manager Features 3 3 PT Programming Feature Guide 295 2 3 System Data Control User Manual References User Manual 3 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming 3 2 Manager Programming 3 3 Customising Your System System Programming 296 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 3 Quick Setup Description It is possible to set up the basic PBX parameters using a personal computer PC When a PC accesses the PBX for the first time with the Installer Level Programmer Code
37. Ring Tone Patterns 1 280 ms Single Double Triple S Double Programming Example of Ring Tone Pattern Table There are a specified number of programmable tables each of which allows the assignment of ring tone patterns for the following incoming call types For trunk calls including trunk call hold recalls and doorphone calls select ring tone patterns on a trunk group or a doorphone port basis Timed Call te Reminder Back eall me me Por pona z pause 5e 9me Single Dowe i fr frlif i fr fa Each extension can select one of the tables EN Conditions PT Ring off Setting can be enabled or disabled through system programming If disabled PT users cannot set the ring off Feature Guide 35 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 3 36 Call Waiting Description Used to inform a busy extension that another incoming call is waiting The busy extension user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold The waiti following notification method can be assigned for each extension depending on the call ng and the telephone type a Call Waiting Tone Tone from the handset or built in speaker b OHCA Voice from the built in speaker c Whisper OHCA Voice from the handset d Off No notification Notification Method Call Type DPT Other Telephone Intercom Call Call Waiting tone OHCA Call Waiting tone Off Whisper
38. This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 257 Diversion supplementary services If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call the following situation will be possible Example E p Extn 1000 Extn 1001 Dials 2000 Vi Et eh A Zeit t Ze e fe d JE tl Ei i i i Je e e ia e ml em ll Conditions Extn 2000 Leer se SEERE SEE SNE ER EE EA E 2 E el ld E en tbe Add em i p mem Extn 2000 Forward Destination of Trunk Calls 1001 I9 Extension 1000 of PBX 1 dials extension number 2000 and the call is sent to extension 2000 of PBX 2 through QSIG network The call is forwarded to the forward destination of trunk calls of extension 2000 which is extension 1001 of PBX 1 The call between PBX 1 and PBX 2 is released and the call is connected directly to the forward destination of extension 2000 e This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN QSIG port of the PBX Feature Guide 267 1 27 Networking Features User Manual References User Manual 1 5 1 Forwarding Calls 268 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features 1 27 3 4 Call Transfer CT by QSIG Description The PBX transfers the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications
39. This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 182 Advice of Charge AOC supplementary service Digital Subscriber Signalling System No One DSS1 protocol Conditions e A DPT user can see the call charge information on the display during the call e Budget Management If the amount of call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit an extension user cannot make further calls 1 8 2 Budget Management e AOC for ISDN extension An ISDN extension also receives AOC Feature Guide 183 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 184 Description An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature when the call is received through an ISDN line Extension users can set the forward destination to the network on an MSN basis The setting must have been done beforehand to use this feature There are the following types Incoming calls are forwarded unconditionally An incoming call is forwarded when the destination on the PBX is busy Call Forwarding No An incoming call is forwarded when the Reply CFNR destination on the PBX does not answer within a preprogrammed time period When the CFB or CFNR has been set the network determines to forward the incoming call to the preprogrammed
40. Time Table number is assigned to each DID DDI number DIL table can be programmed for each trunk and a tenant Time Table number is assigned to each trunk 2 2 System Configuration Software lt DID DDI Table gt Location DID DDI Tenant DID DDI Destination No Time Pop i Jfr fi gt lt DIL Table gt Trunk No Tenant Time DIL Destination 101 100 VPS 100 VPS ILS Explanation If a trunk call with a DID number 123 4567 is received at 20 00 1 Tenant Time Table number 1 will be used 2 The call is received during night mode in Time Table 1 3 The call will be routed to the extension 100 VPS 4 Holiday Mode The holiday mode activates automatically using the Automatic Switching mode Up to 24 holidays start and end dates can be stored and one time mode can be selected for all holidays 5 Time Service Button A flexible button can be customised as the following buttons a Day Night button b Day Night Lunch button c Day Night Break button d Day Night Lunch Break button Each of these buttons is used for switching between modes For example pressing the Day Night button switches between day and night modes All of these buttons show the current status as follows Red on Night mode Slow green flashing Slow red flashing Holiday mode Feature Guide 287 2 2 System Configuration Software Note Any extension user except extension users allowed to change the
41. a During a Conference call 1 13 1 Conference Features b While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 22 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration c While receiving OHCA 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA d While being monitored by another extension 1 7 3 Call Monitor e During Consultation Hold Consultation Hold Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting Wireless XDP Parallel Mode can only be set from a PS The wired telephone can accept or deny this feature through COS programming Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone 515 Once this feature is set the setting at the wired telephone cannot be changed unless a PS changes the setting The following features are not available for extensions in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode while the PS is on a call however they are available for the extensions in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode while the wired telephone is on a call Automatic Callback Busy 1 23 Portable Station PS Features Executive Busy Override Whisper OHCA 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA CCBS gt 1 19 1 9 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS e Most of the extension data e g extension number extension name of the wired telephone is used for its PS as well However the PS has its own extension data for the following Ring Tone Pattern Table Sel
42. destination e g Operator Line DIL Direct Inward Directs a call with a DID number from a DID e 1 1 1 3 Direct Dialling DID line to a preprogrammed destination Inward Dialling DID is also known as Direct Dialling In DDI DID Direct Dialling In DDI Multiple Directs a call with an MSN from an ISDN line to 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber a preprogrammed destination Subscriber Number MSN Number MSN Ringing Service Ringing Service 3 Destination Change with the Caller s Identification Number The Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution feature works in conjunction with the DIL DID DDI MSN features Description Calling Line Directs a call to a CLI destination if the callers 1 1 1 5 Calling Identification identification number has been assigned to the Line Identification CLI Distribution Caller ID Table CLI Distribution 4 Available Distribution Feature for Each Optional Trunk Card Type bd pucoT gt KIN fd WE Note Enable default v Enable Feature Guide 15 1 1 Incoming Call Features 5 Available Destination Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX 7777 EE EES 077777777 v 7777 ve Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Line Access Idle Line Access no Phone no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension T
43. en 02 04 01 04 1 5 2 5 END 3 5 4 5 S ENTER LCOT Flash Recall Time 417 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 417 gt e Bitno gt Pono gt gt 01 10 01 16 None 80 96 1 12 Eve 300 600 900 ENTER 1200 ms option KX TDA30 417 gt e Seel Porto gt r ENTER 02 04 01 04 None 80 96 112 END 300 600 900 ENTER 1200 ms option Feature Guide 339 3 3 PT Programming LCOT Disconnect Time 418 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 418 gt e SlotNo gt Port No gt ED i gt 7 01 10 01 16 0 5 1 5 2 0 SR ENTER 4 0 12 0 s ENTER KX TDA30 418 gt e Slot No gt PortNo gt gt er 02 04 01 04 0 5 1 5 2 0 END ENTER 4 0 12 0 s ENTER BRI Network Type 420 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 420 gt e Slot No gt Port No gt Network Type gt r 553 ENTER HII GE PE ENTER ST KX TDA30 420 re gt Slot No gt Port No gt Network Type gt er ENTER ep bene 9 ENTER END BRI DIL DDI MSN Selection 421 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 421 gt er SlotNo gt PotNo gt ED ert z END ENTER a 01 08 DIVDDIMSN ENTER KX TDA30 421 gt er SlotNo gt Porno gt ED 9 gt KI Be 01 02 DIL DDI MSN END ENTER ENTER 340 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming BRI Subscriber Number 422 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 422 gt on al Esch e 01 10 01 08 Max 16 digits ENTER ENTER KX TDA30 422 gt e SlotNo
44. flashing Rapid green Incoming Incoming call flashing call Privacy Release Other This extension extensions is logged out are using of the incoming extension Jall trunks call distribution Another in the trunk group extension group is using the line Another extension has the line on Exclusive Hold Another extension is holding the line Rapid red Incoming call to the incoming call flashing distribution group in Ring distribution method Feature Guide 173 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 3 Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button Corresponding Extension Status Button Light Pattern ot fide Busy DND for trunk calls Rapid red flashing Incoming call 4 Flashing Light Patterns 1 second Slow Flashing Moderate Flashing i Rapid Flashing a i i Conditions e The incoming call shows on the buttons in the following priority ICD Group gt S CO gt G CO L CO gt INTERCOM Feature Guide References 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution 1 2 2 6 Log in Log out 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 1 12 1 Call Hold 1 13 1 2 Conference 1 13 1 3 Privacy Release 174 Feature Guide 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 18 4 Display Information Description A display PT shows the user the following information while making or receiving calls if they are available Display Item Display Example The
45. 00 01 05 01 02 02 01 07PM 123456XX 00 12 05 98765 01 02 02 08 33AM In the office 01 02 02 01 07PM LOG IN 01 02 02 03 35PM LOG OUT 01 02 02 03 45PM EXT12355 Pattern B 80 digits with call charge information Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Duration Cost ACC Code CD 8 digits 7 4 2 20 8 2 01 02 0210 03AM 1210 01 lt l gt 01 02 0210 07AM 2005 01 12345678901234567890 00 00 05 Pattern C 120 digits Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration Cost ACC Code CD 8 digits 7 4 4 50 8 3 01 02 02 10 08AM 1230 0001 123456789012345678901234567890 00 00 05 00560 00EUR 9876543210 TR 01 02 02 10 07AM 1230 0001 I ABC COMPANY123456789012345 0 05 00 00 05 9876543210 TR 226 Feature Guide Explanation 1 24 Administrative Information Output Features The following table explains the SMDR contents which are based on the numbers in the previous pattern examples For the programmable items refer to the following Programmable Items Number in the Pattern Extension CO Trunk Dial Number Shows the date of the call Shows the end time of a call as Hour Minute AM or PM Shows the extension number floating extension number etc which was engaged in the call Also shows the following codes Dxxx Outgoing trunk call from a doorphone xxx doorphone number 1 15 1 Doorphone Call Txxx Outgoing trunk call by TIE line service xxx trunk group number xxx Verified call xxx
46. 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 3 Direct In Line Refer to the DIL feature 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL DIL Feature Guide 197 1 21 T1 Line Service Features KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only Number In Description the Table H 4 Off Premise An SLT which is installed off site can perform as if it were Extension installed locally The SLT makes and receives a call OPX through the PBX An extension number can be given to the OPX and extension data such as COS is also applied Example Extn 103 IS JE Dials 103 Extn 101 Extn 102 Automatic Receives the callers number from the T1 line Number When the ANI number is received it can be treated the Identification same as a Caller ID number 1 16 1 Caller ID ANI Conditions e faT1 line is used as a trunk the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company 198 Feature Guide 1 22 Voice Mail Features 1 22 Voice Mail Features 1 22 1 Voice Mail VM Group Description A VPS can be connected to extension ports on the PBX The extension ports make a group called a VM group This group has a floating extension number The VM group can be the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls When receiving a call the VPS can greet the caller offering them the option to leave a message or dial a number to reach the desired party The VPS can record the message for each extens
47. 1 25 1 25 1 1 25 2 mbh sch sch sch sch sch wech mb o sech sesch sch mb Ao sch mb bd be wech Il Il Il sch gh ke 510 0 ME 139 Optional Device Features 142 Doorne OE 142 DOOF gie 144 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 145 Background Music BGM nennen nnne 146 Outgoing ME Sage OGM avse 147 Direct Inward System Access DISA 149 Caller ID TE 156 SED EEE 156 Incoming Call og 161 Message e 163 Message Waling 163 ADSeDEMSSSUES acras ea a 166 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 167 FAO DUNONG taste C 167 EO leen 510 1110 EEN 170 KE INN 173 Display Irotormatton 175 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 177 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 177 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMA
48. 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD e COS programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer a call to an outside party gt Call Transfer to Trunk 503 COS can also prohibit transferring to an extension of another PBX via the TIE line service using the PBX Code method Access with PBX Code 1 27 1 TIE Line Service e Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement If the transfer destination does not answer within the preprogrammed Transfer Recall time Transfer Recall Time 201 the call will be redirected to the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which transferred the call If the destination is not assigned the call will return to the extension Available destination Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS Feature Guide 1 11 Transferring Features DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code e One touch Transfer The DSS Console and the PT user can hold a call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the DSS button directly A One touch Dialling button can also be used if the TRANSFER command is stored with a number 1 6 1 Memory Dialling Features User Manual References User Man
49. 364 4 2 Bud 367 4 2 4 Tones Ring Iones nennen 367 4 3 EISE OF ADD EVANG rq eee 369 4 3 1 List of Abbreviations nennen nnn nnn nennen snas 369 NEXT 12 Feature Guide Section 1 Call Handling Features Feature Guide 13 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 4 Incoming Trunk Call Features 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Description Incoming calls via a trunk public line are distributed to their destination using a suitable distribution feature 1 Available Networking Type for Each Optional Trunk Card Type Each trunk port of an optional trunk card can be assigned its networking type Public Private or VPN Virtual Private Network Networking Public Private Virtual Private Type DIL DID TIE Network DDI MSN VPN Channel Type deele l Lecot Tv II TIE E amp M BCEE OPX EXTN PP gt DR2 E amp M C E amp M P E amp M EEE BRI PRI STN QSIG Master pr Slave IP GW Note Enable RR Enable 1 1 27 1 TIE Line Service 2 gt 1 27 2 Virtual Private Network VPN N NIIS e 14 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 2 Distribution Feature One of the following features can be assigned to each trunk port rem Desertion been Direct In Line Directs a call to a preprogrammed single e 1 1 1 2 Direct In DIL
50. 4 eight party conferences 8 three party conferences 2 four party conferences 10 three party conferences Feature Guide 135 1 13 Conference Features 1 13 1 2 Conference 136 Description This PBX supports three through eight party conference calls During a two party conversation an extension user can add other parties to their conversation thereby establishing a conference More than four party conferences are only possible when a PT user originates the conference Unattended Conference A PT user can leave a conference to allow other parties to continue the conversation The user may return to the conference if he desires Conditions CONF Conference Button For a PT which does not have the CONF button a flexible button can be customised as the Conference button Unattended Conference Call Duration The call duration can be restricted by the Unattended Conference Recall time The Unattended Conference Recall time consists of the following programmable timers a Unattended Conference Recall Start Time When the timer expires Unattended Conference Recall starts to be heard at the conference originator If the originator does not return to the conference 1st Unattended Conference Recall Continuation time will start b ist Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time When the timer expires an alarm tone starts to be heard at parties in the Unattended Conference If the originator does not return to t
51. 9335 ARS Exception Number 325 334 ARS Leading Number 321 334 ARS Mode 320 333 ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access 352 9335 ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 331 346 335 ARS Routing Plan Table Number 322 9334 ARS Routing Plan Time Table 330 334 ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access 351 9335 ARS gt Automatic Route Selection ARS 111 Audible Tone Features 240 Authorisation Code 115 Automatic Call Hold 130 Automatic Call Park 132 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 92 Automatic Extension Release 69 Automatic Log out 53 Automatic Number Identification ANI 156 Automatic Privacy 138 Automatic Redial 88 Automatic Redial Interval 206 331 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 205 331 Automatic Route Selection ARS 111 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 111 Automatic Setup 298 Automatic Station Release gt Automatic Extension Release 69 Background Music BGM 146 Basic Programming 325 BGM gt Background Music BGM 146 BGM External 146 Boss amp Secretary feature 61 BRI Configuration 426 342 BRI DIL DDI MSN Selection 421 340 BRI Layer 1 Active Mode 424 341 BRI Layer 2 Active Mode 425 341 BRI Network Type 420 340 BRI Subscriber Number 422 341 BRI TEI Mode 427 342 Budget Management 105 Built in Small Call Centre Features 4 Busy Line Busy Party Features 92 372 Feature Guide Busy on Busy 51 Busy Station Signalling BSS Call Waiting 36 Buttons and
52. ARS dial setting above If the user dialled number is selected in ARS dial setting the dialled number will be shown as dots regardless of this setting Privacy dial Enables or disables privacy dial If enabled the last four digits of the dialled telephone number and any additional digits after connection will be shown as X e g 123 456 XXXX Date order The date order is changeable month day year day month year year month day year day month Conditions SMDR Format The following SMDHR format can be set through system programming in order to match the paper size being used in the printer a Page Length determines the number of lines per page SMDR Page Length 802 b Skip Perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page SMDR Skip Perforation 803 The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip perforation length Explanation o PECES O O O O O O O O O Page z O Length O Skip O O eren 4 O O Oes O O O O O Machine A O Perforation O The SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is reset If the PBX is reset during a conversation the call will not be recorded on the SMDR The following calls are regarded as two separated calls in the SMDR Calls before and after the flash recall EFA signal is manually sent during a conversation Trunk to trunk calls by Call Transfer FWD or DISA recording each as incoming call and outgoing call
53. Add the number C Add the Carrier Access code Analogue Line Insert a pause ISDN T1 E1 Line Insert a pause and change to tone DTMF signal Add the Authorisation code for a tenant Add the Authorisation code for a trunk group Add the Itemised Billing code Add the dialled number after the digits are removed Home position Programming Example Cariertable 1 2 O Removed Number or Digis 6 0 Example Dialled number 0123456789 Trunk Access no is ignored 042345 6789 mp 0077 6789 12 Modification 9 Remove 6 digits Add the number Add the Carrier Access code 40 114 Feature Guide 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features gt ARS Carrier Name 350 gt ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access 352 gt ARS Carrier Access Code 353 gt ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access 351 gt N 6 Optional Assignment Authorisation Code for a Tenant An Authorisation code can be assigned for each carrier and each tenant Authorisation Code for a Trunk Group 2 An Authorisation code can be assigned for each trunk group and each carrier Itemised Billing Code An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension and for each verified code If a call is not made from an extension e g DISA or TIE and no verified code is used the Itemised Billing code assigned in the location 1 of the verified c
54. Co Ltd Panasonic Communications Company U K Ltd declare that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC If you would like to receive a copy of the original Declaration of Conformity of our products which relates to the R amp T TE please visit our web address http doc panasonic tc de Trademarks Notes Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners Screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation There are some optional service cards PTs and features which are not available in some areas Additionally there are some optional service cards and features for the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 which are not available for the KX TDA30 or vice versa Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information Displays are described in English as samples While all system programming can be performed through PC programming 2 3 1 PC Programming PT programming can only cover a subset 2 3 2 PT Programming In Section 1 Call Handling Features and Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features programming re
55. Codes with limited authorisation Administrator Level default 1111 and User Level default none 4 Click Connect USB from the menu bar File Connect Tool Utility Window Help L Modem ISDN Remate Pisconnect EU xj 5 Type the system password for installer m default 1234 then click OK to log in Password zm Feature Guide 317 3 2 PC Programming 318 6 When country area data do not match a Click OK to replace the country area data of the PBX Replacement may take several minutes to complete b Follow the procedure described in Section 2 13 1 Starting the Hybrid IP PBX for KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 6 12 1 Starting the Hybrid IP PBX for KX TDA30 in the Installation Manual and restart the PBX C Repeat steps 2 to 4 to restart the Maintenance Console 7 Follow the instructions of the wizard and assign the basic items Quick Setup Date amp Time 20030323 120000 System Password 1234 ten Re enter System Password Please change the system password from default If you did not change this the system security problem may happen on your PBX system Ei KX TDA Maintenance Console The programme menu appears File Connect Tool Utility Window Help D mt a e 2 7 1 Contiguration 2 System 3 Groups 4 Extension 5 Optional Device 6 Feature Fr TRS BARS H 9 Private Network 4 10 00 amp Incoming Call 11 Mainten
56. Extension to Trunk Call Duration 472 472 re gt Trunk Group No gt Time eer END 01 64 60 mi ENTER BEEN ENTER Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 473 473 gt er Trunk Group No gt Time gt er i END ENTER 01 64 01 60 min ENTER DISA Silence Detection 475 CD 475 gt r Trunk Group No gt OD gt r EI 01 64 No Detect END ENTER ed ENTER DISA Continuous Signal Detection 476 476 gt G Trunk Group No gt p o gt E 01 64 No Detect END ENTER S ENTER DISA Cyclic Signal Detection 477 477 gt r TrunkGroupNo gt D r SELECT END 01 64 No Detect ENTER Detect ENTER 344 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Caller ID Signal Type 490 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 490 gt amp Sotto en 9 01 10 FSK FSK with ENTER Visual Caller ID DTMF ENTER KX TDA30 490 gt e Seite gt gt 6 C3 02 04 FSK FSK with ENTER Visual Caller ID DTMF ENTER Pay Tone Signal Type 491 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 491 gt e SlotNo gt SD gt QS a ENTER 01 10 12 16 KHz ENTER Feature Guide 345 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 7 COS Programming Trunk Group Number 500 500 gt e gt TimeNo gt gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch 01 64 ENTER 3 Break 4 Night Trunk Group No gt ar gt A E 01 64 AUTO ANS MESSAGE END Disable Enable ENTER HOLD To the Next To the Next Trunk Group COS No No ENTER v EN
57. FWD The FWD feature can be assigned on an incoming call distribution group basis e COS for Incoming Call Distribution Groups Each incoming call distribution group is assigned a COS number Group FWD to an outside party can be enabled or disabled for each COS The COS for incoming call distribution groups is also used for the Internal Call Block feature when an extension user calls an incoming call distribution group the PBX checks the COS of the calling extension against the COS of the incoming distribution group 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block 42 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons Feature Guide 43 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Description The Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions using the distribution method until a preprogrammed number of extensions agents Maximum Number of Agents 632 are available to accept a call When incoming calls exceed the number the calls enter a queue 1 2 2 3 Queuing Feature 1 Distribution Method There are three distribution methods which can be assigned to each incoming call distribution group Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method 624 Distribution 5 EE Method H Uniform Call Calls go to a different extension uniformly each time a call is Distribution received
58. Features 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Description There are the following features to access a trunk Idle Line Selects an idle trunk Dial the Idle Line Access number Or Access Local automatically from the assigned press a L CO button Access trunk groups Trunk Group Selects an idle trunk from the Dial the Trunk Group Access number Access corresponding trunk group and a trunk group number Or press a G CO button Selects the desired trunk directly Dial the S CO Line Access number and the trunk number Or press the S CO button Conditions COS programming determines the trunk groups available for making calls Trunk Group Number 500 Trunk numbers can be referred on a trunk port basis LCOT BRI Trunk Number Heference 409 Button Assignment A flexible button can be customised as a G CO L CO or S CO button as follows Assignable parameter i No parameter All assigned trunk groups EE Ee through system programming are applied Group CO G CO A trunk group is assigned Single CO S CO A specified trunk is assigned It is possible to assign trunks in the following ways The same trunk to the S CO button and to a G CO button The same trunk group to more than one G CO button More than one L CO button Dialling the Trunk Access number selects a CO button according to the priority S CO gt G CO L CO Direct Trunk Access By pressing an idle CO button it automatically switches on th
59. Floating Extension No 1 1800 Company A 23 20 CompanyB VM Group Floating Extension Number 660 Incoming Calls to VM Group When incoming calls are received at the floating extension number of the VM group calls will hunt starting at the lowest VM port number In this case the FWD and DND settings 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND for each extension port are disregarded Itis programmable whether the calls queue when all extension ports in the group are busy through system programming If the queuing is disabled through system programming the call will be redirected to the preprogrammed destination by the Intercept Routing feature Conditions General It is possible to call an extension extension port in a VM group directly If the calls are routed directly to the extension in the group it is possible to enable some features e g FWD Idle Extension Hunting on the extension in the group The Voice Mail DTMF DPT Digital Integration e g command transmit is also available on the extension Feature Guide 201 1 22 Voice Mail Features e One touch Voice Mail Feature Access It is possible to assign a One touch Dialling button for direct access to a Voice Mail feature gt 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling For example to access a mailbox mailbox number 123 of the VPS extension number 165 directly assign 165 6123 to a One touch Dialling button When pressing this button
60. Indication Features 1 1 3 1 Incoming Call Indication Features SUMMARY Description Incoming calls are indicated by various methods as follows we So Deem etalon 34 Ring Tone Voice calling LED LED Light Emitting Diode Display Caller s Information External Pager Tone Voice during a Conversation Feature Guide Ring Tone Pattern Selection Alternate Receiving Ring Voice LED Indication Display Information Trunk Answer from Any Station TAFAS Call Waiting A telephone rings when receiving acall The ring tone patterns can be changed for each incoming call type A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice through personal programming The light shows line conditions with a variety of light patterns The display shows the caller s information The external pager sends a ring tone when receiving a call A busy extension hears a tone or voice from the handset built in speaker indicating that another incoming call is waiting e 1 1 3 2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection e 1 5 3 Intercom Indication Display Information e 1 15 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS e 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Description A ring tone pattern can be selected for each incoming call type on a Ring Tone Pattern Table basis which can be assigned for each extension
61. KX TDA200 3 2 Connection KX TDA100 KX TDA200 3 3 Installation of the KX TDA Maintenance Console KX TDA100 KX TDA200 lt KX TDA30 gt 6 5 6 RMT Card 7 1 Overview KX TDA30 7 2 Connection KX TDA30 7 3 Installation of the KX TDA30 Maintenance Console Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 3 2 PC Programming Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 2 PT Programming Description A PT user can perform the following programming a Personal Programming Customising the extension according to his needs b System Programming Customising the PBX according to organisational needs c Manager Programming Customising specified frequently changing items eg Charge Management and Remote Extension Lock Conditions COS programming determines what programming can be performed gt Programming Mode Limitation 516 System programming and personal programming Personal programming only No programming The extension which is connected to the lowest numbered extension port can perform both personal programming and system programming regardless of the COS The extension s assigned as the manager COS can perform manager programming e During programming the PT is considered to be busy Access to system programming and manager programming is allowed only one at a time
62. Lamp light pattern can be selected from the twelve patterns shown below System programming for each extension port is required to use this feature Feature Guide 163 1 17 Message Features SLT Message Waiting Lamp Light Patterns 5 128 1 28 s Pattern 1 ON OFF Pattern 2 ON OFF ON Pattern 3 OFF Pattern 4 ON OFF N Pattern 5 3 OFF ON Pattern 6 OFF N Pattern 7 OFF ON Pattern 8 OFF ON Pattern 9 OFF ON Pattern 10 OFF 164 Feature Guide 1 17 Message Features Pattern 11 ON OFF Pattern 12 ON OFF e tis possible to set Message Waiting while hearing a ringback tone busy tone or DND tone e Messages are always left on the original extension Messages cannot be sent to their FWD destination 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD e Both the message sending extension and receiving extension can cancel a left message e If the message receiving extension calls the sending extension and is answered the message will be cleared automatically However if the message has been left on the VPS it depends on the VPS Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 9 3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Feature Guide 165 1 17 Message Features 1 17 2 Absent Message Description The extension users can set the message e g the reason for
63. No The call is routed to the Yes operator Intercept Routing No Destination Does the call have its CLI information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode No Yes CLI works Yes Is the CLI destination assigned Is the DID DDI destination No for the time mode assigned The call is routed to the The call is routed to the CLI destination DID DDI destination Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the DID DDI destination but routed to the CLI destination The call is routed to the operator Intercept Routing No Destination Feature Guide 19 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Example of DID DDI Table DDI can be programmed as DID Locat DID DDI DID DDI DID DDI Destination on No Name Day Lunch Bresk Night Day Lunch Break 0001 123 4567 John White Enab Disab 100 it DID Number 451 2 gt DID Name 452 3 DID Destination 453 Note Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the DID DDI table Tenant number is used to determine the time mode day lunch break night for the corresponding DID DDI number VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 1 22 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Explanation If t
64. No 1234 EXTN P MP 1234 1284 1234 Extn No 13X MSN G 131 132 d 13 1234 Up to eight terminals can be connected to the port and receive a call simultaneously N 131 139 Up to eight terminals can be connected to the port ISDN Port for EXTN P MP 130 All terminals receive a call simultaneously III erer A E III ISDN Port for Extn No 14XX MSN EXTN P P P MP ISDN Port for EXTN P P P MP 1400 1499 Each terminal receives a call Use the DDI MSN feature of the behind PBX JE 1400 1401 ITF I Oo 2 idle Extension Hunting is available Conditions e Subaddressing Subaddressing is possible between ISDN terminal devices The subaddress goes through the PBX to the ISDN terminal devices directly e Call Transfer PBX feature is available only for ISDN extensions in P MP configuration gt 1 11 1 Call Transfer 192 Feature Guide 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features e ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features or idle extension hunting group 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting In this case an MSN can be assigned e If the last digit of the MSN is 0 all terminal devices on the same ISDN port receive the call simultaneously if the specification of each terminal device is av
65. No Destination on off The Intercept Routing No Destination feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming If disabled reorder tone will be sent to the caller However the Intercept Routing No Destination feature always works for calls through the LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card even when disabled e Ifan operator tenant PBX is not assigned The lowest jack numbered extension will be the intercept destination e Intercept Routing No Destination also applies to Calls from doorphones Feature Guide References 2 2 5 Operator Features 30 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 2 Internal Call Features 1 1 2 1 Internal Call Features SUMMARY Description The following incoming calls reach their destination Feste Dewnpion Gesten Intercom Call A call from one extension to another e 1 5 3 Intercom Call Doorphone Call When a call from a doorphone reaches its destination 1 15 1 the recipient can talk to the visitor Doorphone Call Available Destination The destinations of doorphone calls can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service on a doorphone port basis Doorphone Call Destination 720 Calling from Destination Extension Doorphone Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX BEEN Incoming Call Distribution Group el ew VM Group DTMF DPT ele Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Line Acces
66. Numbering 100 328 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 300 Floating Extension 305 Floating Station gt Floating Extension 305 Full One touch Dialling 86 FWD gt Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 56 FWD All Calls 59 FWD Busy 59 FWD Busy No Answer 59 FWD FollowMe 59 FWD No Answer 59 G Group 279 Group Call Distribution 44 Group Call Pickup 66 H Handover 215 Handset Headset Selection gt Headset Operation 119 Hands free Answerback 67 Hands free Operation 116 Headset Operation 119 Hold Recall 130 Hold Recall Time 200 331 Holding Features 130 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 77 Host PBX Access Code 471 HotLine 91 Hot Line Waiting Time 204 331 Hurry up Transfer gt Manual Queue Redirection 48 344 374 Feature Guide Idle Extension Hunting 38 Idle Extension Hunting Group Member 681 Idle Extension Hunting Type 680 354 Idle Line Access Local Access 82 Idle Line Access Local Access 103 Idle Line Preference 81 Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing 621 350 Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method 624 351 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features 40 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY 40 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 622 351 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 620 350 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 623 351 In
67. OHCA Off Trunk Call Call Waiting tone Off Including a doorphone call call via an incoming call distribution group and a transferred trunk call from another extension This feature is also Known as Busy Station Signalling BSS Conditions Feature Guide Call Waiting call for an extension in a VM group DPT DTMF is not available Data Line Security Setting Data Line Security cancels the Call Waiting setting 1 10 5 Data Line Security Call Waiting Tone A PT user can hear different Call Waiting tones for trunk call and intercom call if Tone 2 has been selected through personal programming Call Waiting Tone Type Selection If Tone 1 has been selected the same Call Waiting tone will be heard for both trunk call and intercom call All Call Waiting tone patterns have a default gt 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones Caller Information With the Call Waiting tone the caller s information flashes on the display for five seconds at 15 second intervals Call Waiting from the Telephone Company Besides the Call Waiting service within the PBX the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from your telephone company informs the extension user of another incoming trunk call that is waiting He can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold For details consult your telephone company Call Waiting Caller ID Visual Caller ID With the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line
68. TIE line by using the DISA feature Example Telephone Company TIE Line Network He nn be e ali el n ii PBX Code 952 952 9 01 23 4567 TIE Line Outside Caller Outside Party 01 23 4567 z number 9 01 23 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 4567 VE Dials DISA phone Ge fa tn i Se si iy a Gt i ae Explanation 1 The outside caller dials the DISA phone number of PBX 1 Idle Line Access number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 PBX 1 modifies the call adds 952 and the Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and sends the call to PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 01 23 4567 Feature Guide 257 1 27 Networking Features 4 TIE Line Routing Flowchart Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension A TIE line call is made as follows PBX Code Method 7 abc xxxx Extension No Method dexx Is the dialled number identified as a TIE line access no or an other PBX extension no in the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX No Not treated as a TIE line call Yes TIE line access no 7 Other PBX extension no de Is the leading number abc or de found in the TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of the own PBX No Reorder tone Se
69. Whisper OHCA if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset Feature Guide 99 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Description TRS Barring can prohibit an extension user from making certain trunk calls by COS programming It is applied when the user goes off hook a trunk is seized and then a dialled number is sent to the trunk Each COS is programmed to have a TRS Barring level for each time mode day lunch break night There are seven levels available Level 1 is the highest level and the level 7 is the lowest That is level 1 allows all trunk calls and level 7 prohibits all trunk calls Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables Denied Code Tables An outgoing trunk call made by an extension with a level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the applicable Denied Code Tables If the leading digits of the dialled number not including the Trunk Access number are not found in the table the call is made There are five Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited These numbers are defined as denied codes Exception Code Tables These tables are used to
70. and if LCS is activated for the PT in Private mode both the PT and SLT can be used to monitor calls while in idle status The SLT will ring to indicate a message is being recorded The call can be monitored with the SLT by going off hook To intercept the call press Flash Recall button or flash the hookswitch 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone LCS Button A flexible button can be customised as the LCS button Extension Personal Identification Number PIN To prevent unauthorised monitoring it is recommended the LCS user assign an extension PIN This PIN will be required when setting LCS 1 25 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN If the user forgets the PIN it can be cleared by an extension assigned as the manager Each extension can be programmed to either end recording or continue recording the conversation after the call is intercepted through personal programming LCS Mode Set After Answering To use the LCS feature on a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode LCS can only be turned on or off from the wired telephone In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode setting LCS on off from the PS has no effect 1 23 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Two way Recording into the VPS Two way Record Two way Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Two way Record or the Two way Transfer button An extension number can be assigned to the Two way Transfer button so that it can be used as a one touch record button for the
71. beginning and at the end of the number to be concealed It is programmable whether the concealed part will appear on the SMDR TRANSFER T Stores a transfer command by pressing the Transfer TRANSFER button at the beginning of the number used only for a One touch Dialling 1 11 1 Call Transfer Example Storing T 305 Transferring a call to extension 305 Available only when in the system personal programming mode FLASH RECALL F Stores a flash recall signal EFA mode by Hooking pressing the FLASH RECALL button at the Example When storing the number 9 123 456 7890 and concealing the telephone number 123 456 7890 Enter 3 INTERCOM 1 2 S 4 S 7 8 PI 0 INTERCOM Notes e tis possible to store a Memory Dialling feature number in the beginning of the Memory Dialling numbers e tis possible to store several feature numbers in one Memory Dialling location Conditions Trunk Access by Memory Dialling A specific Trunk Access number can be stored with the telephone number in Memory Dialling However if Memory Dialling is done after selecting a trunk the stored Trunk Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected trunk Feature Guide 85 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling Description APT user can access a person or feature by one touch This is activated by storing the number e g extension number telephone number or feature numb
72. call distribution group and each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service The two different destinations can be assigned one for the a and b Destination When All Busy 627 and one for c d and e Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 625 Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX 0 Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no m 1 nano Mese v EE Bow ee meet e Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code 50 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 2 Busy on Busy The Busy on Busy feature works when the destination for the Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group feature is not assigned in one of the following conditions a There is no space in the Waiting queue b The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in Example of ai When the answering agent number Maximum Number of Agents 632 is 2 and the queuing call number Queuing Call Capacity 628 is 0 There are five assistants in the shop If two of them are engaged on the phone the next caller will hear busy tone to prevent the caller from thinking that there is no one in the shop or that the shop is close
73. call in hands free mode or Auto Answer G B used for microphone or handset mute during a MUTE conversation Dual feature button Used to monitor an intercom call automatically a hands free conversation is not possible Also used for handset microphone mute during a conversation AUTO DIAL Used for System Personal Speed Dialling and storing STORE programme changes CONF Used to establish a multiple party conversation Conference FWD DND Used to CC ae 5 FWD or DND Dual feature button to insert a pause in a stored number With an APT it is used as the PROGRAM button Used to select the item displayed on the bottom line of the display SELECT Used to select the displayed item or to call the displayed number SHIFT Used to access the second level of Soft button items MODE Used to shift the display to access various features VOICE CALL MUTE d mi DSS Console Used to answer an incoming call or place the current call on hold and answer another call with one touch Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer 168 Feature Guide 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to nen are ea II a different trunk or to another feature button Flexible DSS Direct Station Used to access an extension with one touch Every button is programmed to correspond to an extension DSS buttons Se
74. can show the total call charges on the display The call charge is totalled on an extension trunk or verified code basis The call charge on a verified code is not totalled for each extension 5 Budget Management It is possible to limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension or verified code For example an extension in a rented office has a prepaid limit for the telephone usage If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit the extension user cannot make further trunk calls An extension assigned as the manager may increase the limit or clear the previous call charge 1 8 2 Budget Management 6 Call Charge Management A manager can use the following call charge management features in manager programming mode a Call Charge Fee Reference and Clear for Each Extension Verified Code b Call Charge Fee Reference for Each Trunk C Call Charge Rate Set for Each Trunk Group d All Clear e Call Charge Fee Print Out f Budget Management for Each Extension Verified Code Examples of Call Charge Fee Reference Yokckck c ck c e A 3 Charge Meter Print Out Total amp AI CO
75. charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company Forwards an incoming call to another outside party using the ISDN service of telephone company e 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI e 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service e 1 19 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP e 1 19 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC e 1 19 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP e 1 19 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Sew pen Call Hold Puts one ISDN call on hold e 1 19 1 6 Call HOLD by ISDN Hold HOLD by ISDN Call Transfer Transfers an ISDN call to an outside party Call 1 19 1 7 Call CT by ISDN Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer Transfer without Announcement are available CT by ISDN Malicious Call An extension user can ask the telephone e 1 19 1 8 Identification company to trace a malicious caller Information Malicious Call MCID on the malicious call will be received later on Identification MCID Completion of If an outside called party is busy an extension 1 19 1 9 Calls to Busy can receive callback ringing when the called Completion of Subscriber party becomes free Calls to Busy CCBS Subscriber CCBS 3 ISDN Centrex Service An extension user can have access to the features of the ISDN Centrex Se
76. disable this feature by COS programming on the VPS VPS Trunk Service amp Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call Multiple tenants can share a single VPS each tenant does not require a dedicated VPS port If the destination of the incoming trunk call is a VM DPT group the PBX sends the VPS trunk group number and time mode day lunch break night of the tenant 2 2 4 Time Service assigned for the call to the VPS Therefore the VPS can send the assigned message company greeting to the caller Corresponding VPS trunk group number and tenant number are determined by the setting of the incoming trunk call as follows a DIL TIE the setting of each trunk port 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 27 1 TIE Line Service b DID DDI the setting of each location number for DID DDI 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI c MSN the setting of each MSN 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Example For DID Calls Each location number can have its VPS trunk group number message number and tenant number DID Programming eT ES EE DID DID Destination IS Trunk rasen rer aaa E Trunk Group No Company Greeting No Incoming Call Service Day 1 Custom Service 11 lunch 2 Custom Service 29 Custom Service 12 wen ast rie ME S Explanation A DID call reaches a VM DPT group directly or by the Intercept Routing fea
77. distribution group Log in Log out PSinthe group Call Group Incoming Call feature Wrap up uses one channel Distribution Distribution Group feature and ICD when a call Group Member 620 and Group button for arrives at the Features set the group call the group group distribution method for the group to Ring Assign all desired Only one channel PS users in the PSs to one PS ring is usedwhena group cannot use group call arrives at the the Log in Log group out and Wrap up features e When a PS joins a PS ring group the following personal settings are disregarded a When the PS ring group is called Delayed Ringing Display information when the incoming calls arrive The settings e g display priority are disregarded The setting which is assigned on the PS e g FWD The status of the PS e g busy b Log in log out setting from the PS ring group from the incoming call distribution group which the PS ring group belongs to gt 1 2 2 6 Log in Log out Note Log in log out setting of the PS ring group from the incoming call distribution group is also disregarded 218 Feature Guide ER j PS Ring Group 1 23 Portable Station PS Features mem i 4 q Log out b des E 1 he 1 i Brusen 1 I j S SE i Incoming Call 1 a a 4 Distribution Group PS Ring Group Log in CX mus gt x 4 2 gt a 4 i I T i k i k
78. e CLIP COLP number for each extension CLIP COLP Number 606 e CLIP COLP number for each incoming call distribution group Each extension can select either the CLIP COLP number for the ISDN port or the extension to be used The CLIP COLP number for the incoming call distribution group is used when making a call by pressing the ICD Group button or receiving a call which arrives at the ICD Group button Calling Connected Line Identification Restriction CLIR COLR It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its telephone number to the network by pressing the CLIR button COLR button or entering the feature number These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 093 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR supplementary service ETS 300 098 Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR supplementary service Conditions e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e The CLIP COLP number for the connected ISDN port can be used for the ISDN terminal devices which cannot be assigned their own CLIP COLP number such as a doorphone e COLP CLIR COLR Assignment for Each Port Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX e CLIR Button and COLR Button It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button A flexible bu
79. extension number and name of the 123 Tom Smith calling or called extension or incoming call distribution DEE ed number and name of the optional Door 02 1st Door device The dialled telephone number The received call information line message a Caller s name ABC Company can be either a 0 b Callers number 12345678 or e at each c Trunk number name Line 001 Sales extension through d Original Destination if the call is 102 Mike system programming forwarded e DDI DID MSN name or number Panasonic Call charge fee during a trunk call The currency Currency 131 position of the currency symbol and the decimal point Decimal Point Position for Currency 130 are programmable Call duration during a trunk call Line 001 11 02 28 E Conditions e Multilingual Display Each extension can select its display language through personal programming Display Language Selection e Display Contrast It is possible to adjust the display contrast through personal programming Display Contrast Selection This is available only for DPTs e Display Backlight Each extension can select its display backlight on or off through personal programming Display Backlight Selection This is available for the KX T7633 and KX T7636 e Characters name or digits number exceeding the display s size limitation are not displayed In this case information which have been programmed is hidden but not alter
80. for BGM with the KX TDA30 BGM2 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 710 Conditions e Hardware Requirement User supplied music source e Volume Control It is possible to change the volume of an internal and or external music source e tis possible to choose a different music source for each tenant 2 2 3 Tenant Service Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals lt KX TDA30 gt 6 10 1 Connection of Peripherals 134 Feature Guide 1 13 Conference Features 1 13 Conference Features 1 13 1 Conference Features 1 13 1 1 Conference Features SUMMARY Description A conference call allows a conversation between three or more parties simultaneously The following features are available to establish a conference call rn Besxplon Beas Conference During a two party conversation an extension user can 1 13 1 2 add other parties to establish a conference call with up Conference to eight parties Executive Busy An extension user can interrupt an existing call to e 1 7 2 Override establish a three party conference call Executive Busy Override Privacy Release During a conversation with an outside party on the S 1 13 1 3 CO button a PT user can allow another extension to join Privacy the conversation Helease Conditions e One PBX supports a maximum of 32 simultaneous calls which are engaged in conference calls e g
81. from the telephone company the Caller ID number can be received and flash on the display twice for five seconds at 15 second intervals 1 1 Incoming Call Features Feature Guide References 1 7 4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension User Manual References User Manual 1 4 4 Answering a Call Waiting 1 7 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 37 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting 38 Description If called extension is busy or in DND mode Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group which can be programmed through system programming Idle Extension Hunting Group Member 681 Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type Idle Extension Hunting Type 680 This feature is also known as Station Hunting Circular Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group in a circular way Incoming call Busy BY gt extn E Assigned order gt Terminated Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group until reaching the last assigned extension Incoming call Busy Assigned order ma Conditions e
82. group Status Status specified incoming call distribution group Used to log in or log out from all incoming After Log After Log call distribution groups to which you out belong Operation Operation e Ifan ICD Group button is assigned it also shows the log in log out status of the corresponding group The light pattern is the same as the Log in Log out button which includes the group number e Wrap up Button A flexible button can be customised as the Wrap up button It shows the current status as follows Red on Not Ready Off Ready Wrap up mode cancel e When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode completes a call neither the PS nor its wired telephone can have Wrap up time 1 23 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode e Automatic Log out A member extension may be logged out automatically if the Unanswered time expires a preprogrammed number of times consecutively The number of consecutive unanswered calls can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group If the extension is a member of more than one incoming call distribution group the unanswered number is counted across all corresponding incoming call distribution groups It is possible to return to the log in mode manually Automatic Log out feature does not work for the extension in an incoming call distribution group in Ring distribution method 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution e Log in Log out Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor and control
83. group on a port or channel basis Port basis LCOT DID E amp M ISDN BRI ISDN PRI23 ISDN PRI30 Channel basis E1 T 1 User Group The PBX supports user groups gt User Group 603 each of which is used to compose the following groups a Tenant 2 2 3 Tenant Service b Call Pickup Group See below C Paging Group See below Every extension must belong to one user group but cannot belong to more than one user group Assignable Extensions PT SLT PS ISDN Extension T1 OPX Example User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4 EI ei RE AE el ie Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 105 Extn 106 Extn 107 Se Ze ehr be ee w le ee es ee ee Je ee ee lt ee ge e ee ee ee ee es ee Al 2 1 Call Pickup Group User Groups of a Pickup Group 650 Using the Group Call Pickup feature extensions can answer any calls within a specified group One user group can belong to several call pickup groups gt 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3 Example User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4 Si ENE EE l d e e en 4 et lt et lt lt eg Sei et lt Zeg i Set lt lt Se re Se cn zeg sl Feature Guide 279 2 2 System Configuration Software 280 Paging Gro
84. gt Port No gt Subscriber No gt er ENTER 02 04 01 02 Max 16 digits ENTER BRI Layer 1 Active Mode 424 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 424 gt er Slot No gt PortNo gt gt O gt DO 01 10 01 08 Permanent END ENTER Call by call ENTER KX TDA30 CD 424 gt er SlotNo gt PortNo gt ED gt O gt m 02 04 01 02 Permanent END ENTER Call by call ENTER Note This programme needs Slot Card Reset 902 to enable after setting BRI Layer 2 Active Mode 425 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 425 gt er SlotNo gt PortNo gt gt Q gt m 01 10 01 08 Permanent END ENTER Call by call ENTER KX TDA30 CD 425 gt e SlotNo gt PortNo gt ED gt O gt m 02 04 01 02 Permanent END ENTER Call by call ENTER Note This programme needs Slot Card Reset 902 to enable after setting Feature Guide 341 3 3 PT Programming BRI Configuration 426 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 426 Gr SlotNo gt Port No gt ED r DI 5 END ENTER SE P P P MP ENTER KX TDA30 426 gt e SistNo Pato gt END ENTER nd 2 P P P MP ENTER Note This programme needs Slot Card Reset 902 to enable after setting BRI TEI Mode 427 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 427 gt er gt PortNo TEL gt 5 gt DI Sea 01 10 01 08 00 63 for Fix ENTER END Clear for Automatic KX TDA30 427 gt r SlotNo gt PortNo TE gt
85. gt gt gt 01 16 1 64 ENTER a gt gt gt gt a A dini END 1 4 digits ENTER 354 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming PS Registration 690 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 690 gt CO PSNo gt Extn No gt er poi 4 digi END ENTER 001 128 1 4 digits ENTER zz below KX TD7690 gt amp Po P Push power PushF3 C Tone button for 2 key for 2 seconds seconds KX TDA30 To the P 690 gt erem Et No gt r pegi gt C3 ENTER 001 028 1 4 digits ENTER below KX TD7690 gt r gp Pushpower PushF3 C Tone button for 2 key for 2 seconds seconds Note Please refer to Installation Manual for the PS registration in detail With the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 For registering the DECT PS 2 8 7 Connecting the Cell Station to the Hybrid IP PBX For registering the 2 4 GHz PS 2 9 7 Connecting the Cell Station to the Hybrid IP PBX With the KX TDA30 For registering the DECT PS 6 7 7 Connecting the Cell Station to the Hybrid IP PBX For registering the 2 4 GHz PS 6 8 7 Connecting the Cell Station to the Hybrid IP PBX PS Termination 691 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 691 gt gt Psio gt O gt m ENTER 22 ENTER KX TDA30 691 re gt gt 4 E ENTER Ee ENTER ge Feature Guide 355 3 3 PT Programming Personal Identification Number PIN for PS Registration 692 692 gt ee PINforPS Registration gt e DO 1 4 digits END
86. has used the CLIP for the incoming call distribution group by pressing the ICD Group button when the CCBS has set 1 19 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP After using the CCBS feature using Last Number Redial will not retrieve the number dialled by CCBS 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial An extension user that has set the CCBS feature cannot receive callback ringing while the extension is holding a call User Manual References User Manual 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer Feature Guide 191 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 1 10 ISDN Extension Description An ISDN BRI PRI port can be used for either trunk or extension connection When extension connection is enabled ISDN terminal devices e g ISDN telephone G4 fax machine personal computer or a behind PBX can be connected to the port If the ISDN port is in point to point P P configuration one terminal device can be connected to the port If the ISDN port is in point to multipoint P MP configuration a maximum of eight terminal devices can be connected to the port However only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously Individual terminal devices on a behind PBX can be addressed with Multiple Subscriber Number MSN The MSN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit O through 9 or 00 through 99 Example ISDN Port for Extn
87. hour Format 000 gt e gt Cear Month Date gt e gt gt 01 31 ENTER SES SC ENTER CO gt Hem gt O gt C3 01 12 00 59 AUTO ANS MESSAGE END NEXT AM PM ENTER HOLD In 24 hour Format 000 gt Q gt Year month gt Date gt LC pp kr 00 99 01 12 01 31 gr gt GS gt Gem gt y E S END NEXT 222 GE ENTER HOLD System Speed Dialling Number 001 001 gt e gt Speed Dialling No gt Telephone No gt er 000 999 Max 32 digits END ENTER ENTER To the Next Speed Dialling No To the Desired Speed Dialling No v NEXT CANCEL System Speed Dialling Name 002 002 gt 8 gt Speed Diang na gt Name gt e gt EI 000 999 Max 20 characters END ENTER ENTER Extension Number 003 003 9 gt Current Extn No New Extn No gt eh gt 1 1 4 digits 1 4 digits ENTER ENTER Feature Guide 325 3 3 PT Programming Note If a PC Phone PC Console or CTI application software is running on the PC that is connected to the PBX quit it before this programme Extension Name 004 004 gt e gt Emro Name gt e gt C3 1 4 digits Max 20 characters END ENTER ENTER Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 005 005 gt 9 No gt PN gt O gt 4 digi iai END ENTER 1 4 digits Max 10 digits ENTER WARNING When athird party discovers
88. in Parallel Mode An APT and an SLT can also be connected to a super hybrid port and used in parallel mode Digital XDP KX TDA30 only A DPT can be connected to another DPT and act as a completely different extension 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone 2 1 System Configuration Hardware Wireless XDP Parallel Mode A PS can be used in parallel mode with a wired telephone 1 23 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment When a DSS Console is connected a paired extension must be assigned through system programming Console Paired Telephone 007 Only a PT can be a paired extension Feature Guide 277 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Description Each extension is assigned a COS number Class of Service 602 The following features are controlled on a COS basis a b c d e f 9 h i j k l m n 0 p q r S t u v w Conditions Internal Call Block 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block FWD 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD DND Override 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND Call Pickup 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Account Code Entry 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry External Call Block 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Executive Busy Override 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override Call Monitor 1 7 3 Call Monitor OHCA 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whi
89. in parallel with a wired telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode In this case the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone 1 23 Portable Station PS Features PC Phone PC Console Features This PBX supports PC Phone and PC Console These Panasonic CTI applications provide advanced features Feature Guide 5 Table of Contents 6 ek ect med Ohm nanman RRR p aiD H go POUN zech sch o sesch b sch mmh sch ln RON I 1 5 4 2 1 5 4 3 1 5 4 4 1 5 4 5 1 5 4 6 1 5 4 7 1 5 4 8 1 5 5 1 5 5 1 Call Handling Features 13 Incoming Call E 14 Incoming Trunk Call Features 14 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY gt 14 Bro GU BI D EE 17 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 19 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 22 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 25 TAST 85 01 ROUINO EE 27 Intercept Routing No DESTINATION BE 30 Idee 31 Internal Call Features SUMMARY
90. mailbox of the specified extension One touch Two way Transfer Button When all of the VPS ports are busy a Pressing the Two way Record button sends an alarm tone Feature Guide 213 1 22 Voice Mail Features b Pressing the Two way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends an alarm tone Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons 1 22 1 Voice Mail VM Group User Manual References User Manual 1 9 3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 3 2 2 Manager Programming 214 Feature Guide 1 23 Portable Station PS Features 1 23 Portable Station PS Features 1 23 1 Portable Station PS Connection Description This PBX supports the connection of a PS e g KX TD7590 KX TD7690 It is possible to use the PBX features using the PS like a PT Conditions The PS registration is required through the system programming PS Registration 690 To avoid unexpected registration to another PBX the Personal Identification Number PIN for the PBX is necessary to register a PS Personal Identification Number PIN for PS Registration 692 The registration can be cancelled PS Termination 691 Handover Even if a PS user moves during a conversation the PS will automatically switch between cells without disconnecting the call Handover Handover is available in any of the following cases a During a conversation with an extension or o
91. method 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Hands free Answerback for Trunk Calls System programming is required to use this feature Secret Monitor The beep tone which the called party hears before answering can be eliminated through system programming Alternate Receiving Calling Mode Ring Voice Override Hands free Answerback overrides the Alternate Receiving mode preset on the telephone and the Alternate Calling mode from the caller Hands free Answerback with Headset The Hands free Answerback feature can also be used with a headset Feature Guide References 1 5 3 Intercom Call User Manual References User Manual 1 3 2 Answering Hands free Hands free Answerback Feature Guide 67 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 1 Predialling Description A display PT user can check and correct the number to be dialled on hook The call will be initiated after going off hook Conditions e Storing the Predialled Number in the Personal Speed Dialling The predialled number can be stored in the Personal Speed Dialling by pressing the AUTO DIAL STORE button 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System In this case the extension will enter into the personal programming mode automatically so that a name can be assigned for the stored number User Manual References User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 68 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 Automatic Extension Rele
92. mode can only check the current status on the display by pressing the Time Service button Conditions e PT programming Time Service Starting Time 102 can set the Start and or End time of the following Day 1 Day Start time Lunch Lunch Start time Day 2 Lunch End time Night Night Start time PC programming can also set the following three time periods for break mode per day Break 1 Start Break 1 End Day restart Break 2 Start Break 2 End Day restart Break 3 Start Break 3 End Day restart e Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual Button A flexible button can be customised as the Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual button Feature Guide References 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons 2 2 3 Tenant Service User Manual References User Manual 1 7 10 Checking the Time Service Status 2 1 2 Time Service Mode Control 288 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 5 Operator Features Description This PBX supports a PBX operator and a tenant operator Any extension and incoming call distribution group can be designated as a PBX and or a tenant operator PBX operator An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a PBX operator for each time mode day lunch break night gt Operator Assignment 006 Tenant operator An extension or incoming call distribution gro
93. o do p Available If trunk call is available Account Code Entry 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry is also available Note DISA AA service and Operator Call 2 2 5 Operator Features are available for any security mode Security Mode Override If the caller operates with the following features while hearing a DISA message the security mode can be changed to the No Security mode temporarily Walking COS 1 8 5 Walking COS Walking COS feature number extension number extension personal identification number PIN Verified Code Entry 1 8 6 Verified Code Entry Verified Code Entry feature number X verified code verified code PIN After changing mode the mode remains in force for the duration of the call Available PBX Features with Security Mode Override After Security Mode Override is done with the Walking COS feature the following features are available It regards a remote operation from the assigned extension 1 25 5 Remote Extension Control by User FWD DND Log in Log out 1 2 2 6 Log in Log out Absent Message 1 17 2 Absent Message Extension Lock 1 8 3 Extension Lock Time Service Switching Mode 2 2 4 Time Service DISA Intercept Routing Busy DND If the destination called by the outside party is busy or in DND mode and if 1 the busy destination does not set Call Waiting FWD or Idle Extension Hunting or 2 the destination is in DND mode and Idle Extension Hu
94. override a programmed denied code A call denied by the applicable Denied Code Tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code Tables and if a match is found the call is made There are five Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes These numbers are defined as exception codes TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling If the call is made using System Speed Dialling the call can override the TRS Barring Each COS is programmed to have a TRS Barring level for System Speed Dialling TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 300 Once this feature is set it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialling calls with the level for System Speed Dialling Any extension which sets Extension Lock can also make a call using System Speed Dialling 100 Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features TRS Barring Level TRS Barring level is determined by the applicable levels of Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Tables for Levels 4 through 6 Tables for Levels 5 through 6 t s TRS Barring Denied Code 301 7 gt TRS Barring Exception Code 302 Explanation Level 1 Allows all calls Level 2 Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Table for Level 2 exc
95. service User Manual References User Manual 1 3 6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties Malicious Call Identification MCID 190 Feature Guide 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 1 9 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS Description If the called party is busy and the call has been made using an ISDN line an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free When the user answers the callback ringing that party s number is automatically dialled This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 359 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS supplementary service Conditions This feature is available under the following conditions a Thecaller s PBX is capable of using CCBS and the service is provided by the network b The called party s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS To receive and send CCBS receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN port basis through system programming An extension user can set only one CCBS The last setting is effective The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds If an extension user makes a call using the CCBS feature the preassigned CLIP number for the extension will be used even though the extension has set CLIR or the extension
96. set the Executive Busy Override Deny mode Executive Busy Override Deny 506 e This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions a b c d e f 9 Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security 1 10 5 Data Line Security has been set While being monitored by another extension 1 7 3 Call Monitor While receiving OHCA 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA or Whisper OHCA 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA During a Conference call 1 13 1 Conference Features During a doorphone call 1 15 1 Doorphone Call While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 22 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration During Consultation Hold Consultation Hold Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting e This feature is not available for a trunk to trunk call via DISA User Manual References User Manual 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 7 7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide 93 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 3 Call Monitor Description Allows an extension user to listen to the busy extension user s existing conversation The user can hear the conversation but the user s voice is not heard If desired interrupting the call to establish a three party co
97. the N END ENTER Maximum Number of Agents 632 Incoming Call 632 gt Q Distribution gt Number of Agents gt r imitati END ENTER Group No No Limitation 1 32 ENTER 352 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming User Groups of a Paging Group 640 640 gt e Paging Group No gt User Group No gt ED pp ENTER 01 32 001 032 No Yes gt e m END ENTER External Pagers of a Paging Group 641 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 641 gt e gt Paging Group No gt External Pager No gt EP pp 1 2 ENTER 01 32 No Yes gt gt Qr E END ENTER KX TDA30 641 gt e gt Paging Group No gt External Pager No gt EP pp ENTER 01 32 1 No Yes gt gt Qe LJ END ENTER User Groups of a Pickup Group 650 650 gt gt Pickup Group No gt User Group No gt ED rr ENTER 01 64 001 032 No Yes gt gt i END ENTER Feature Guide 353 3 3 PT Programming VM Group Floating Extension Number 660 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 660 gt e gt VM DPT Group No gt Extn No gt e ED 122 END ENTER EES ENTER KX TDA30 660 gt e gt VM DPT Group No gt Extn No gt er E ENTER 1 1 4 digits Beef END Idle Extension Hunting Type 680 680 gt er Hunting Group No gt ED re gt L 01 64 Circular ENTER Terminate ENTER Idle Extension Hunting Group Member 681 681 gt e gt Hunting Group No
98. the Trunk Access method e 1 5 5 3 Trunk every time he makes a trunk call Access 80 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Description A PT user can select the outgoing line he prefers to originate calls on from the following line preferences through personal programming Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing When an extension user goes off hook an extension line is selected automatically Idle Line When an extension user goes off hook an idle trunk is selected automatically from the assigned trunk groups No Line When an extension user goes off hook no line is selected He must select the desired line to make a call Prime Line When an extension user goes off hook the preset line is selected automatically A prime line can be selected from the Line Access buttons S CO G CO L CO ICD Group Conditions e Line Preference Override A user can override the preset Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired Line Access button or Memory Dialling button e g One touch Dialling before going off hook e To select Idle Line Preference the trunk groups available to the extension should be programmed on a COS basis gt Trunk Group Number 500 Also trunk groups available for Idle Line Access should be assigned Idle Line Access Local Access 103 User Manual References User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 81 1 5 Making Call
99. the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS It is also possible to send the AA command even in the VM service mode when calls are intercepted so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox This can be performed by selecting AA through system programming 1 22 Voice Mail Features Transmitted Command Parameter TransmittedCommand In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Answer by Switching to VM command Recording message command Mailbox Recording message command H H Mailbox No 6 H H Mailbox Nol AA Switching to AA command 8 Switching to AA command 8 None Default DTMF commands are not sent Work with default of the VPS Example of a amp b Trunk Call Sent 6 102 o o mailbox number Switching to VM command Transfer FWD Intercept VPS In AA service mode Eun VM Port 1 VM Port 2 VM DTMF Y VM Port 3 i Group c Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension The extension user should use the Voice Mail VM Transfer button when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension with the required command after t
100. the log in log out status of the incoming call distribution group members 1 2 2 7 Supervisory Feature e Log in Log out Information on SMDR Log in Log out information can be printed out on SMDR 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 8 1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out Wrap up Feature Guide 53 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 7 Supervisory Feature Description An extension preprogrammed as a Supervisor Supervisor extension can monitor and control each membere status within the incoming call distribution group using a 6 line display PT Featwe Degri ien gt Incoming Call Queue The supervisor extension can monitor the status of an incoming Monitor call distribution group with the display Log in Log out Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor the log in log out Monitor and Remote status of the incoming call distribution group members through the Control corresponding DSS button light Remote Control The supervisor extension can change the status of the members by pressing the corresponding DSS button Example lt Incoming Call Queue Monitor Display gt 31 Jan 08 13AM FRI Date and time 250 Sales Section Floating extension number name of incoming call distribution group Waiting Calls Now 00006 The number of queuing calls Max Waitin
101. the outgoing message OGM of the mailbox will be heard KX TDA100 KX TDA200 e All ports in a VM DPT group must be connected to a single DHLC or DLC card KX TDA30 e All ports in a VM DPT group must be connected to either the same DLC card or to the preinstalled super hybrid ports Feature Guide References 1 22 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 1 22 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 202 Feature Guide 1 22 Voice Mail Features 1 22 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration Description The PBX and the VPS connected to the PBX can transmit commands using DTMF signals to each other The PBX sends preprogrammed commands using DTMF to the VPS automatically to change the answering service between Voice Mail VM service mode and Automated Attendant AA service mode or to inform the extension status e g busy The VPS sends the commands to the PBX like an SLT The following answering services and features are available 1 Voice Mail VM Service Mode When a caller reaches the VPS the VPS greets and guides the caller to leave a voice message for a specified mailbox Example The VPS sends the message to the caller Thank you for calling Panasonic Please enter the mailbox number of the person you wish to leave your message for i The caller dials the mailbox number Then the dialled number is sent to the VPS via the PBX i The VPS sends the personal greeting to the caller You have reached Mike s voice mail
102. the user can access special services such as computer accessed long distance calling or voice mail services To convert to the DTMF mode wait for a preprogrammed time period Default 5 seconds after the trunk is connected or press X This feature works only on trunks set to Pulse mode DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode e tis possible to select a pulse rate for the trunk port which has been set to Pulse mode LCOT Pulse Rate 411 There are two pulse rates Low 10 pps and High 20 pps e tis possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to the trunk port which has been set to DIMF mode LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration 412 74 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 5 Reverse Circuit Description The circuit in the PBX can detect the reverse signal from the telephone company when an extension user is trying to make a trunk call This detects the start a called party goes off hook and end the called party goes on hook of an outgoing trunk call When an trunk call is received the circuit can also detect the reverse signal after an outside caller goes on hook The duration of call can be verified on SMDR using this feature gt 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR It is possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal for outgoing trunk calls only or for both outgoing and incoming trunk calls or for no trunk call disable the detection through system progra
103. through 4 If Type A is selected all dial tones 1 through 4 will become dial tone type A The dial tone type for the ARS feature can be selected separately If Type A is selected for the ARS dial tone 1A will be heard If Type B is selected dial tone 1B will be heard e Distinctive Dial tone Distinctive dial tone mode can be disabled In this case dial tone 1 will be sent Dial Tone Patterns All dial tone patterns have a default 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones e Only dial tone 1 is sent to the extensions in the VM DPT DTMF group 1 22 1 Voice Mail VM Group 240 Feature Guide 1 26 Audible Tone Features 1 26 2 Confirmation Tone Description At the end of feature operations the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to extension users Tone 1 a Sent when the setting is accepted b Sent when a call is received in voice calling mode Alternate Receiving Ring Voice The caller s voice will be heard after the tone Tone 2 a Sent from an external paging device or an extension before being paged b Sent when a call is received in Hands free Answerback mode Tone 3 1 a Sent before a conversation is established when using the Paging feature b Sent when a conversation is established with the extension in the following modes after the call making operation e Hands free Answerback mode e Voice calling mode Alternate Receiving Ring Voice Tone 3 2 Sent just befo
104. to you at the new location Example This feature is useful when e Moving location e There is no specific desk for your use This feature is also known as Walking Station Conditions e This feature is available by switching the telephone between PT and PT SLT and SLT PT and SLT Moving across the tenants is also possible e The incoming calls to your extension will also reach you at your new location e An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature 1 25 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN e Ifa DSS Console is connected to a PT and the DSS Console is continuously used with the PT after the Walking Extension has been done the new extension number of the PT must be assigned as the paired extension through system programming Console Paired Telephone 007 User Manual References User Manual 1 10 1 Using the Same Settings as Your Previous Extension Walking Extension Feature Guide 237 1 25 Extension Controlling Features 1 25 4 Timed Reminder Description Each extension user can set an alarm for any time as wake up call or reminder This feature can be programmed to activate only once or daily If the user goes off hook during the alarm he hears special dial tone If a voice message is used he hears a prerecorded voice message Conditions e Be sure that the PBX clock works e Setting a new time clears the previous time e Programmable Tim
105. will be disconnected Retrying the call is possible by pressing X during the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time Call Deny Extensions can deny DISA calls on a COS basis Verified Code PIN Lock Extension PIN Lock If the wrong PIN is entered incorrectly three times the line will be disconnected If the incorrect PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively the PIN against 1 15 Optional Device Features the verified code or the extension will be locked Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the PIN will be unlocked and will be cleared e Each outgoing message OGM call have a name through system programming Outgoing Message OGM Name 731 for programming reference Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 6 1 OPB3 Card 2 6 5 MSG4 Card lt KX TDA30 gt 6 5 4 MSG2 Card Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND User Manual References User Manual 1 2 8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 2 9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA Remote Setting Feature Guide 155 1 16 Caller ID Features 1 16 Caller ID Features 1 16 1 Caller ID 156 Description The PBX receives caller s information such as the callers name and telephone number on trunk
106. will greet and guide the caller Any extension assigned as the manager can record outgoing messages OGMs 1 15 5 Outgoing Message OGM DISA Intercept No Dial If the caller fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept DISA Intercept Time 211 following the outgoing message OGM the call is redirected to the operator extension DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number DISA AA Service After listening to the outgoing message OGM the caller may dial a single digit DISA AA number The destination for each DISA AA number can be assigned for each message It is also possible to assign other DISA floating extension number as the destination Multistep DISA AA Service If the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA the DISA AA service is not employed DISA Security Mode and Available Features If the DISA AA service is not employed the caller may access the PBX features by entering the feature numbers To prevent others from accessing the PBX features it is possible to assign DISA security gt DISA Security Mode 732 The features available depend on the preprogrammed DISA security mode as follows Feature Guide 149 1 15 Optional Device Features 150 Mode All Security Trunk Security No TIE Line Call Security Intercom Call Without PBX With PBX Trunk Call Code Code dot b
107. 011 Code 951 PBX Code 952 Note When a TIE line call is sent to a PBX from another PBX first the PBX modifies the number sent to the PBX according to the assignment for each trunk port of the PBX the removed number of digits from and or added number to the number sent to the PBX is determined by the assignment Then the PBX starts to check the number whether the number has the PBX code of the PBX 3 TIE Line and Trunk Connection To connect the TIE line with the trunk the following patterns are available 1 Trunk to TIE Access 2 TIE to Trunk Access 3 Trunk to TIE to Trunk Access 3 1 Trunk to TIE Access It is possible to assign an extension of another PBX as the destination of incoming trunk calls to the own PBX 248 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features a Incoming Trunk Call Destination Assignment Example Telephone Company E re we MA TIE Line Network PT m ps en en wn m Outside Caller be E ials 123 4567 e Extn 2011 Dials 123 4567 Extn 1011 DID No 123 4567 Explanation An outside caller dials the DID number 123 4567 The call is sent to extension 2011 of PBX 2 through the TIE line according to the assignment of the DID call destination DID Destination 453 of PBX 1 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI b FWD Call Transfer Intercept Routing to the TIE Line Example Telephone
108. 1 8 3 Extension Lock 72 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry Description An account code is used to identify outgoing trunk calls for accounting and billing purposes The account code is appended to the SMDR call record Therefore for example the firm uses an account code for each client so that the firm can determine what calls were made for the client and can submit a bill to the client according to the client s account code on the SMDR call record There are two methods of entering account codes as follows One of the methods is selected for each extension on a COS basis Account Code Mode 508 Mode Desen Option A user can enter an account code if needed at any time desired A user must always enter an account code before seizing a trunk so as Forced not to forget entering the code Conditions e An account code can be stored into Memory Dialling eg One touch Dialling e Account Button A flexible button can be customised as the Account button The Account button is used in place of the feature number for entering an account code This button is useful because it can be used at any time while the feature number entry is allowed only when hearing a dial tone before seizing a trunk e Account code entry after receiving a disconnection signal from a trunk must be done while hearing reorder tone Otherwise the SMDR call record is output and entry becomes impossib
109. 1 or T1 1 20 1 E1 Identification ANI KX line Line Service TDA100 KX TDA200 only KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only e 1 21 1 T1 Line Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only CLI always works in conjunction with the following call distribution methods a DIL b DID DDI c MSN Ringing Service Each trunk for DIL and the DID DDI MSN number can enable or disable the CLI feature for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service When the call has its Caller ID and the CLI is enabled for the time mode the call will be handled by the CLI method Programming Example of System Speed Dialling Table for CLI EEN System Speed System Speed Telephone No y P CLI Destination Dialling No Dialling Name Co 5 Feature Guide 25 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 System Speed Dialling Number 001 7 System Speed Dialling Name 002 Explanation If the caller s number is 0123 456 7890 The Trunk Access number is disregarded 1 Checks the number in the table gt Matches the number in location OOO 2 The call is routed to the CLI destination extension 200 Conditions e Automatic Caller ID Number Modification The Caller ID number is used after modification by the Automatic Caller ID Number Modification gt 1 16 1 Caller ID Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Sub
110. 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 3 Tenant Service Description This PBX can be shared with certain number of tenants 1 Tenant Configuration 1 1 Tenant Member The tenant members consist of user groups One user group can belong to only one tenant Therefore one extension can belong to only one tenant gt 2 2 2 Group 1 2 Time Service Each tenant has a Time Table The Start and or End time of each time mode day lunch break night can be set for each day of the week The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively gt 2 2 4 Time Service Example Tenant 1 Tenant 2 User Group 1 User Group 5 User Group 2 User Group 6 User Group 3 User Group 4 Use Time Table 1 Use Time Table 2 2 System Management Each of the following system management items can be assigned to each tenant a Tenant Operator extension number floating extension number of incoming call distribution group none 2 2 5 Operator Features b ARS Mode Off Local Access All Access System 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS C Music Source for Music on Hold System BGM Number Cyclic Tone 1 12 4 Music on Hold 282 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software Programming Example Floating extn no 200 Off t Follows the system assignment of a PBX operator Operator Assignment 006 2 Follows the system assignment of the ARS mode ARS Mode 320 3
111. 44 Privacy Release 138 Programming Instructions 313 320 Programming Mode Limitation 516 348 Programming Structure 321 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 167 PS Directory 220 PS Feature Buttons 221 PS Registration 690 355 PS Ring Group 217 PS Termination 691 355 PS gt Portable Station PS Features 215 PT Programming 295 320 PT gt Proprietary Telephone PT Features 167 Pulse to Tone Conversion 74 Q QSIG Network 263 QSIG Network SUMMARY 263 Queuing Call Capacity 628 352 Queuing Feature 47 Queuing Hurry up Level 629 352 Queuing Time Table 630 352 Quick Dialling 90 Quick Setup 297 Feature Guide 375 Index R Receiving Group Features 38 Remote Control 54 Remote Extension Control by User Remote ExtensionLock 106 Remote Programming 810 361 Remote Station Control by User gt Remote Extension Control by User 239 Remote Station Lock Control gt Remote Extension Lock Required Telephone Extension 320 Resource Interface Programming 357 Reverse Circuit 75 Ring 44 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 35 Ringing Line Preference 65 RS 232C Parameter Baud Rate 800 RS 232C Parameter New Line Code 800 RS 232C Parameter Parity Bit 800 360 RS 232C Parameter Stop Bit Length 800 RS 232C Parameter Word Length 800 S S CO Line Access 82 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 95 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension SUMMARY 95 Seizing a Lin
112. 5 Calling Identification CLI destination if the caller s identification Caller Line Distribution ID CLIP ANI has been assigned to the Caller Identification ID Table CLI Distribution Incoming Call Log Caller s information is automatically recorded 1 16 2 in the call log of the called extension This Incoming Call information is used for confirming the caller Log calling the caller back and or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Dialling 3 Number Name Assignment 3 1 Automatic Caller ID Number Modification This PBX automatically modifies the incoming caller s number according to preprogrammed tables The modified number will be recorded for calling back The PBX supports a number of modification tables and each trunk group can select a table for use Each table has ten locations for local international calls and one for long distance calls The PBX checks the local international call data first If a match is not found the long distance call data is applied Example Table Selection Trunk Modification Group No Table Modification Table Modification Table 1 CO i y pooo Area Code Removed No of Digits Added No Local International 3 Local International 2 Call Data 2 1 Local International Call Data 10 Long Distance Call Not Data 1 programmable Note When caller s information is sent through an ISDN line and the call type is Subscriber Nationa
113. 8 22 NNN 278 ES 60 D EEE EEE 279 Bog NNN E 282 2 2 4 Time OV e 285 KE 9 ee E 289 2 2 6 FEE erre Reese 290 2 3 SVEN DAGEN 292 2 3 1 FAS POJAM EEE ETT 292 PCT MEME AM eem mm mmm 295 2o tee EE 297 EE eu Eet EEE ENE E 298 2 3 5 Flexible NumbermnoittvedNumbeng 300 PEG MEME FE aea m TEE 305 2 37 SOftware Upgrading EE 306 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics scsiscscisccsensecsnsecteicussicccseysossanncsaievesisncsevssmasecsateecsinacs 307 2 4 1 Power FE ESN eo aac dust isset terit mte damen E MM IO UEM La UE 307 2 4 2 Power Failure 165 nennen nennen nennen narrar 309 Zr GR ee ALAM Information EO o EET 310 3 Programming Instructions 313 3 Mod 314 3 1 1 OCCO EEE 314 3 2 PCG Programming eR T 315 3 2 1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance 70 80 6 315 3 3 PI ctecosmesenaccusencndoneucseasuseusessuscceaeties saaneeaceenssnees 320 3 3 Programming Instructions nnne nene nnne nnns 320 3 9 2 Basic Rrogrammmg enne nennen nennen nnns nnn nnn nn 325 Date amp Time 000 nen
114. A200 710 357 M sic n Hold 71T e 357 M sicior TE AP EEE NE 357 Doorphone Call Destination 720 358 Doorphone Number Reference 729 358 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 730 358 Outgoing Message OGM Name In 359 DISA SECURITY Mode PP see 359 3 3 10 SMDR amp Maintenance Programming 360 RS 232C Parameter New Line Code 800 360 RS 232C Parameter Baud Rate 800 360 RS 232C Parameter Word Length 800 nnns 360 RS 232C Parameter Parity Bit 800 360 RS 232C Parameter Stop Bit Length 800
115. A200 only 197 TAFAS gt Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 145 Tenant Service 282 Tenant to Tenant Call Block 283 Terminal Device Assignment 601 349 Terminated Hunting 38 TIE Line Service 242 Time Programming 331 Time Service 285 Time Service Manual Switching 514 348 Time Service Starting Time 102 328 Time Service Switching Mode 101 328 Timed Reminder 238 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 100 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 100 Tones Ring Tones 367 Transfer Recall 128 Transfer Recall Time 201 331 Transferring Features 128 TRS Barring Denied Code 301 333 TRS Barring Exception Code 302 333 TRS Barring Level 101 TRS Barring Level 501 346 TRS Barring Level for Extension Lock 510 347 TRS Barring Level for System Speed Dialling 509 347 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 100 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 300 333 TRS Barring Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 100 TRS Barring ARS Programming Trunk Access 82 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Trunk Call Duration Limitation 502 346 Trunk Call Features 71 Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 71 Trunk Call Limitation 123 Trunk Group Access 82 Trunk Group Intercept Destination 470 Trunk Group Number 500 346 Trunk Programming 336 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 123 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 473 Two way Recording into the VPS U U
116. Answer Time 605 Depending on the type of incoming intercom or trunk calls it is possible to set different destination for each Intercom Calls Extension Forwards to to Extension NU id Another Extension Trunk Calls to n d E BRL Forwards to Extension Outside Party Available Forwarding Type All Calls Busy No Answer Busy No Answer Incoming Call Distribution Group Forwards to Incoming Call Im Bag Distribution Group Trunk Calls to P d u u EN Forwards to Incoming Call Outside Party Distribution Group Intercom Calls to Available Forwarding Type All Calls Feature Guide 59 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Available Destination Condition for Original Destination Availability Extension Incoming Call Distribution Group Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 EAM available when FWD to OPX is allowed through COS programming Incoming Call Distribution Group DISA Only available for incoming trunk calls Incoming intercom and doorphone calls cannot be forwarded to a DISA floating extension number Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance ee Idle Line Access no Phone no Only available when FWD to trunk is allowed through Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no COS programming Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code GM Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Only available when FWD to trunk is allowed through COS programm
117. Assign the floating extension number of the ISDN remote interface 64 kbps maintenance ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number through an ISDN 812 and dial this number from the PC to connect to the Extension Line PBX The RMT card is not required for this method This method is available only when an user supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI is used Ka If remote access is disabled through system programming Remote Programming 810 then this on site programming cannot be done 292 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 Remote Programming Method Besorlptlon Using a modem An RMT card must be installed The floating extension number of RMT card the analogue remote maintenance must be assigned Modem Floating Extension Number 811 PC programming using a telephone connected in parallel with the modem can be done in the following ways e Direct Access Dial the DIL DID DDI number whose destination is the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance Through DISA Dial the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance using the DISA feature 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Call Transfer Call an extension probably the operator and request a transfer to the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance 1 11 1 Call Transfer Using an An external modem can be used instead of an RMT card to perform external modem the
118. BX memory is protected by a factory provided lithium battery There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 1 7 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on and Call Park 1 12 2 Call Park Feature Guide 309 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 43 Local Alarm Information 310 Description When a PBX error occurs and the PBX detects it the System Alarm button light on the PT of an extension which is allowed to use this feature through system programming a maximum of two extensions per PBX turns on red Pressing the button will show the error number on the display If multiple errors occur the error number will be displayed in order of highest priority to lowest The System Alarm button light turns off automatically after all error numbers have been displayed For details about the errors and their solutions refer to the Installation Manual Error Example ERR 100 10000 1 2 Explanation Number in the Description Example Shows three digit error code Sub Code Shows five digit sub code XYYZZ X Cabinet number 1 4 YY Slot number 00 11 ZZ Physical port number 01 16 Conditions e System Alarm Button A flexible button can be customised as the System Alarm button e If an extension allowed to utilise this feature uses a PC Console or PC Phone the alarm information will be displayed on the PC e If an extension allowed to utilise this fe
119. CA will become disabled and the calling extension will start to hear a ringback tone While an extension is receiving OHCA if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset Feature Guide 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA Description An extension user can give a message to a busy extension through the handset Conditions COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature This feature is available when the calling and called extension use one of the following telephones KX T7600 series KX 1T7500 series KX T7400 series except KX T7451 If the Whisper OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or telephone type the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension 1 7 4 2 Call Waiting Tone If the called extension does not use a KX T7600 KX T7500 or KX T7400 series telephone but forces Whisper OHCA the announcement may be heard by the other party It is possible to enable Whisper OHCA on any telephone However it may not work properly e g The voice may be heard by the other party While an extension is receiving Whisper OHCA if the extension user places the current trunk call on hold or transfers the current intercom call or trunk call the Whisper OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will start to hear a ringback tone While an extension is receiving the
120. CD gt Uniform Call Distribution UCD 44 Unattended Conference 136 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 44 User Group 603 350 User Groups of a Paging Group 640 User Groups of a Pickup Group 650 User Manual References 2 User to user Signalling Type 1 UUS 1 V Verified Code 120 329 Verified Code COS Number 123 333 145 343 344 212 353 353 178 330 Index Verified Code Entry 109 Verified Code Name 121 329 Verified Code Personal Identification Number PIN 109 Verified Code Personal Identification Number PIN 122 329 VIP Call 49 Virtual Private Network VPN 261 VM Group Floating Extension Number 660 354 VM gt Voice Mail Features 199 Voice Mail VM Group 199 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 210 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 203 Voice Mail Features 4 199 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 272 VoIP gt Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 272 VPN gt Virtual Private Network VPN 261 VPS Data Control by the PBX 213 W Walking COS 108 Walking Extension 237 Walking Station gt Walking Extension 237 Whisper OHCA 99 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 222 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone 515 348 Wrap up 52 X XDP gt Extra Device Port XDP 276 Feature Guide 377 Panasonic Communications Co Ltd 1 62 4 chome Minoshima Hakata ku Fukuoka 812 8531 Japan Copyright This manual is copyrighted by Panaso
121. Call Features C 68 PdA e EE 68 Automatic Extension Helease 69 fallet fore 1 KE EEE NE SEG 70 Trunk Call Features 7 Trunk Call Features SUMMARVY 71 Emergency Os EE 72 EENet 73 Dial Type FN 74 Rovers e EE 75 Eege 76 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 77 Special Carrier EE 79 SEIZING a Line teatures A 80 Seizing a Line Features SUMMARY 80 Feature Guide 1 5 5 2 1 5 5 3 1 6 1 1 6 1 1 1 6 1 2 1 6 1 3 1 6 1 4 1 6 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 7 1 7 1 1 7 2 1 7 3 1 7 4 1 7 4 1 1 7 4 2 1 7 4 3 1 7 4 4 1 8 1 8 1 1 8 2 1 8 3 1 8 4 22 Z io io amp e Oo N 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 10 9 10 10 h 11 1 de N 12 1 12 2 12 3 12 4 h I sech lo lo mb h mb wech I sech Illo zech Il llo ll sch ho gh LU n nn 13 1 1 13 1 1 1 13 1 2 1 13 1 3 1 14 Line Preference Outgoing T 81 NN 82 Memory Dialling Features ooi ie rinde aeuo one cerro ste Eed egegde eeneg 84 Memory
122. Company wes a PBX 2 LUNE i TIE Line Forwarded Transferred i Intercepted to 2011 Outside Caller det IS Extn 1011 Extn 2011 Dials 123 4567 DID No 123 4567 rnm vi ke en we Ae ei rei lt en e end e ei Sie ei ze Feature Guide 249 1 27 Networking Features 250 Explanation An outside caller dials the DID number 123 4567 The call reaches the destination extension 1011 of PBX 1 and the call is forwarded transferred or intercepted to extension 2011 of PBX 2 through the TIE line 3 2 TIE to Trunk Access The PBX sends TIE line calls to the trunks of another PBX through the TIE lines Feature Guide a Trunk Call through Other PBXs by Making a TIE Line Call Method Ken Example lt Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code gt Telephone Company aa Um m est mm TIE Line Network as PBX 1 PBX 2 e mm pm pm em pn em pm em mm i Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 2011 01 23 4567 mn Dials 802 9 01 23 4567 ee ee ee re rm rm rm em e e rm em e rm rm em rm em d Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX 1 8 trunk group number 02 TRG2 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 PBX 1 sends the call
123. Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 181 COLP gt Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG 265 COLR gt Calling Connected Line Identification Restriction CLIR COLR 182 266 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 191 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG 271 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 273 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features Conference 136 Conference Features 135 Conference Features SUMMARY 135 Confirmation Tone 241 CONP gt Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG 265 CONR gt Calling Connected Name Identification Restriction CNIR CONR 266 Console Paired Telephone 007 326 Consultation Hold 93 94 122 133 222 Conversation Features 116 COS Programming 346 COS gt Class of Service COS 278 CPC gt Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 127 CS Status Reference 699 356 CT Call Transfer CT by ISDN 189 CT gt Call Transfer CT by QSIG 269 CTI gt Computer Telephony Integration CTI 273 Currency 131 330 D Data Line Security 120 Date amp Time 000 325 DDI Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 19 Decimal Point Position for Currency 130 330 Delayed Ringi
124. DIL destination but routed to the CLI destination The call is routed to the operator Intercept Routing No Destination Feature Guide 17 1 1 Incoming Call Features 18 Programming Example of DIL Table The table can be programmed for each trunk Destination EI Destination gt Day Break Might Day Lunch Break Night o DIL 1 1 Destination 450 Note Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the DIL table Tenant number is used to determine the time mode day lunch break night for the corresponding trunk VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 1 22 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Explanation If a trunk call is received from trunk 01 In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mode CLI is disabled Route to DIL destination extension 100 Feature Guide References 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 2 2 4 Time Service Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming call with a DID DDI number to a preprogrammed destination Each DID DDI number has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Is the DID DDI number found in the DID DDI table
125. Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 94 Feature Guide 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 1 7 4 4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension SUMMARY Description When attempting to call a busy extension ringing or having a conversation an extension user can send call waiting indication to the busy extension Call Waiting The notification receiving method depends on the called extension s personal setting and the telephone type Notification Description Receiving Method Call Waiting Tone Sends the Call Waiting tone to the busy e 1 7 4 2 Call extension Waiting Tone Off hook Call Talk with the busy extension using the built in e 1 7 4 3 Off Announcement speaker and microphone of the called extension hook Call OHCA while the existing call is made using the handset Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA Give a message to the busy extension through e 1 7 4 4 the handset Whisper OHCA Conditions e Each extension user can choose to receive Call Waiting tone OHCA Whisper OHCA or none of these e OHCA and Whisper OHCA are enabled or disabled by the COS of the calling extension e OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not work for some telephone types In such cases the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension Calling Called Extension s Call Waiting Mode Extension s OHCA COS Mode Call Waiting Tone OHCA Whisper OHCA Disable Call Waiting Call
126. Dialling Features nemen 84 Memory Dialling Features GUMMAHY nnne nnne nennen nennen nnn nnne nnns nennen nnns 84 OE DANN eee 86 KX T7710 One touch Dialling KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 87 ENE tS lU 88 Speed Dialling Personal System nennen nnn nnn nnn nnn nns 89 EU DAN 90 OE of Busy Line Busy Party Features sarssannnnnnannnvnnnnnnnnvannavnnnvennnnannnennansnnavnnnnannannnneen 92 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 92 Executive Busy Override 93 EE 94 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 95 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension SUMMARY gt 95 lee tee Ed 97 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 98 MT TN 99 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 100 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 100 BUCGELIVIGNAGSING Niessen rreo r E a eE 105 ENN 106 BEE EEG EEE 107 EG OJR EE 108 vett EENet 109 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features
127. Digital Network ISDN Service Features 178 2 Feature Guide DDI Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Subaddressing SUB User to user Signalling Type 1 UUS 1 Advice of Charge AOC Call Forwarding CF by ISDN ISDN Supplementary Service Table for Public Network Sew See beraien Direct Dialling In Directs a call with a DDI number to a preprogrammed destination P P only One ISDN port can support a maximum of 10 MSNS for routing incoming calls P MP only Sends the caller s telephone number to the network when making a call The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call Sends the telephone number of the answered party to the network when answering a call The caller can see the number on his telephone display when the line is connected Prevents the callers CLI being presented to the called party by the caller Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party You may add digits after the telephone number These digits will be passed to ISDN terminal device Transmits a specified volume of the data through the D channel between the ISDN terminal devices of different PBXs using UUS types 1 The PBX can receive the call
128. ER 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat 3 TimeC 4 TimeD gt gt gt CD gt gt eu In 24 hour Format 330 gt e gt Pan TaleNo Dayo ARS Time Wo 01 16 0 Sun 1 Mon 2 Tue 1 TimeA 2 TimeB ENTER 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat 3 TimeC 4 TimeD gt gt Hour Minute gt gt gt 00 23 00 59 END ENTER 334 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 331 346 331 346 gt Dame Priority gt 1 6 0 Sun 1 Mon 2 Tue 1 TimeA 2 TimeB ENTER 3 Wed 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat 3 TimeC 4 TimeD Pp Carrier Table No gt e gt L 1 10 None END ENTER ARS Carrier Name 350 350 gt CarierTabie No gt Chame gt gt KI END ENTER 01 10 Max 20 characters ENTER ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access 351 351 gt Q gt Carrier Table No Trunk Group No gt zz gt CO gt E E Disable END ENTER 01 10 oe Enable ENTER ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access 352 352 gt Carrier Table No gt Digits to Remove gt r 7 END ENTER VISTO 0 15 ENTER ARS Carrier Access Code 353 353 gt gt Carrier Table No gt Carrier Access Code gt gt iai END ENTER 01 10 Max 32 digits ENTER Feature Guide 335 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 6 Trunk Programming LCOT BRI Trunk Connection 400 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 400 gt Q gt Slot No gt Port
129. Extn 3999 Router Required Programming PBX For making a call e ARS programming 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS or TIE line service programming For receiving a call e TIE line service programming IP GW e IP address assignment for the own PBX and IP Gateway Circuit other PBXs Conditions e QSIG service is available 1 27 3 QSIG Network Feature Guide References 1 27 1 TIE Line Service 272 Feature Guide 1 28 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features 1 28 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features 1 28 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Description Connecting a personal computer PC to this PBX via a DPT with the USB Module or via a Server PC on a LAN enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in the PC or in the Server PC There are two types of CTI as follows 1 First Party Call Control 2 Third Party Call Control 1 First Party Call Control A PC is connected to a DPT using a USB port USB Module attached to the DPT The PC monitors the status of the DPT and controls the DPT PBX USB DPT PC 2 Third Party Call Control A Server PC is connected to the PBX using the USB port on the PBX or using the CTI LINK card as a CTI interface PCs monitor the status of the PBX and control the PBX via the Server PC PBX Server PC LAN or USB CTI Interface PC LAN Feature Guide 273 1 28 Comp
130. Functions 320 C Call Directory Extension Dialling 70 Call Directory Speed Dialling 89 Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT 208 332 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 184 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 186 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG 267 Call Forwarding FWD 59 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 56 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 56 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY 56 Call Forwarding to Trunk 504 346 Call Forwarding No Answer Time 605 350 Call Handling Features 13 CallHold 130 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN 188 Call Hold Retrieve Deny 130 Call Monitor 94 Call Park 132 Call Park Recall 132 Call Park Retrieve Deny 132 Call Pickup 66 Call Splitting 133 Call Transfer 128 Call Transfer CT by ISDN 189 Call Transfer CT by QSIG 269 Call Transfer to Trunk 503 9346 Call Transfer with Announcement 128 Call Transfer without Announcement 128 Call Transfer Screened gt Call Transfer with Announcement 128 Call Transfer Unscreened gt Call Transfer without Announcement 128 Call Waiting 36 Call Waiting Caller ID Visual Caller ID 36 Call Waiting Tone 97 Caller ID 156 Caller ID Features 156 Caller ID Signal Type 490 345 Caller ID to SLT Port 156 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 25 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 156 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 127 Calling Conne
131. IE with no PBX Code e Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code 6 Intercept Routing After distribution the following features may be required ee Seu pen Intercept No Answer a called party does not answer a call within 1 1 1 6 Routing a preprogrammed time period Intercept Intercept time it is redirected to the preprogrammed Routing destination Busy DND If a called party is busy or in DND mode the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination If a destination is not assigned the call is e 1 1 1 7 Destination redirected to the operator Intercept Routing No Destination 16 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming trunk call to a preprogrammed destination Each trunk has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Does the call have its CLI information and is CLI mode enabled for the trunk and the time mode No CLI works Is the CLI destination assigned No Is the DIL destination of the time mode assigned The call is routed to the The call is routed to the CLI destination DIL destination Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the
132. Idle Extension Hunting applies to Intercom trunk and doorphone calls to a single destination e An extension user can belong to only one idle extension hunting group Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features e If all the searched extensions are busy The PBX redirects the call to an overflow destination which can be assigned for each idle extension hunting group and each time mode day lunch break night gt 2 2 4 Time Service Available Destination Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX PS Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Availability DSA oc Analogue 1SDN Remote Maintenance v Idle Line Access no Phoneno v ne en Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code e FWD DND Mode While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group any extension which has set FWD AII Calls or DND feature will be skipped and the call will go to the next extension in the group Feature Guide References 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Feature Guide 39 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Description An incoming call d
133. Location gt S gt l gt MO 2400 4800 9600 END ENTER 1 NE ENTER RS 232C Parameter Word Length 800 800 gt er Location gt Sec gt e gt m 3 7 8 bits END ENTER ENTER RS 232C Parameter Parity Bit 800 800 gt gt Location Sr Q gt E None Mark END ENTER Space Even Odd ENTER RS 232C Parameter Stop Bit Length 800 800 gt Q9 gt Location gt eer Q gt E 1 bit 2 bits END ENTER ENTER External Modem Control 801 801 gt GS gd gt gt E END ENTER ENTER SMDR Page Length 802 802 gt er Pagelength gt ert END ENTER 4 99 lines ENTER 360 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming SMDR Skip Perforation 803 803 gt amp gt PPer gt gt ENTER 0 95 lines ENTER END SMDR Outgoing Call Printing 804 804 gt ex Seer gt O gt D No print Print END ENTER ENTER SMDR Incoming Call Printing 805 805 gt gt T o 0 LD No print Print END ENTER ENTER Remote Programming 810 810 gt er gt r L3 Disable END ENTER Enable ENTER Modem Floating Extension Number 811 811 gt Q gt Exn No gt gt I 1 4 digits END ENTER ENTER ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number 812 812 gt gt Gmm gt l gt m END ENTER 1 4 digits ENTER Feature Guide 361 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 11 Card Programming Slot Card Type Reference 900 900 e gt aen
134. No gt gt LI 01 10 01 16 AUTO END ENTER No Connect ENTER HOLD Connect To the Next Port No To the Desired Port No v NEXT CANCEL KX TDA30 400 gt e gt SiotNo gt PortNo gt sect L J 02 04 01 04 AUTO GT END ENTER No Connect ENTER HOLD Connect To the Next Port No To the Desired Port No v NEXT CANCEL LCOT BRI Trunk Name 401 401 gt 8 gt ra Came gt gt iai END ENTER 3 digits Max 20 characters ENTER LCOT BRI Trunk Group Number 402 402 gt eer gt Trunk Group No gt e gt E ENTER 3 digits 01 64 ENTER END 336 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming LCOT BRI Trunk Number Reference 409 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 409 Sici o Port ho 01 10 01 16 Reference only END ENTER KX TDA30 409 gt e Slot No gt Port No gt gt ENTER 02 04 01 04 Reference only END LCOT Dialling Mode 410 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 410 gt e Slot No gt PortNo gt cr er L3 END ed 01 10 01 16 DTMF Pulse are ol KX TDA30 CD 410 gt e Slot No gt Port No gt z gt gt DI Be 02 04 01 04 DTMF Pulse ke END LCOT Pulse Rate 411 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 411 gt C gt Slot No gt PortNo Ss rer 01 10 01 16 Low High END ENTER ENTER KX TDA30 411 gt er Slot No PortNo gt rer GE 02 04 01 04 Low High brad END Feature Guide 337 3 3 PT Progra
135. OLP ETS 300 172 Circuit mode basis services CNIP CONP ETS 300 238 Name identification supplementary services CLIP CNIP Example 2 John 101 1 Dials 202 is displayed CLIP 101 CNIP John E E Caller Called party Extn No 101 Extn No 202 Extn Name John COLP CONP Example 1 Dials 203 Extn No 203 Extn Name Tom JE Called party PBX 1 PBX 2 E FWD IRNA etc eae COLP 204 NN Answering party CONP Paul Extn No 204 3 Paul Extn Name Paul 204 is displayed 2 Answers the call Feature Guide 265 1 27 Networking Features 266 CLIP COLP Number The extension number sent to the QSIG network for CLIP COLP can be assigned for each extension through system programming Extension Number 003 CNIP CONP Name The extension name sent to the QSIG network for CNIP CONP can be assigned for each extension through system programming Extension Name 004 Calling Connected Line Identification Restriction CLIR COLR It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension number to the QSIG network by pressing the CLIR button COLR button or entering the feature number Calling Connected Name Identification Restriction CNIR CONR It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension name to the QSIG network When CLIR is activated CNIR becomes active automatically When COLR is acti
136. P COLP Number Selection CLIR Setting COLR Setting Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 005 1 25 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN COS Programming Class of Service 602 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Group User Group 603 2 2 2 Group e Ifthe Extension Feature Clear is performed the corresponding extension data for both the wired telephone and the PS will be cleared gt 1 25 2 Extension Feature Clear e When a call arrives both the wired telephone and the PS ring However in the following cases only the person who made the setting will receive ringing Automatic Callback Busy Transfer Recall Hold Recall 1 12 1 Call Hold and Call Park Recall Feature Guide 223 1 23 Portable Station PS Features Feature Guide References 1 7 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone 1 11 1 Call Transfer 1 12 2 Call Park 1 19 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP User Manual References User Manual 1 7 12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 224 Feature Guide 1 24 Administrative Information Output Features 1 24 Administrative Information Output Features 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Description Automatically records detai
137. PREVIOUS NEXT mp Page up m Page down ENTER Back to Previous Menu CANCEL SHIFT CLEAR SELECT Gei PROGRAM R FE FLASH ELLEN T SECRET 320 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Entering System Programming Mode System programming enables the extension user to set the time call destination and all sorts of system conditions within the limits of available programming The administrator or manager can also set up desired parameters for user programming It is necessary to enter the relevant password to start programming Programming has two levels Administrator Level and User Level Administrator Level All system programming available for PT programming is accessible System Password for Administrator C gt X gt gt d l gt Programming No for PT Programming PROGRAM 3 digits PAUSE 1234 User Level Permitted system programming is accessible Each access to system programming can be controlled System Password for User O gt gt Sens Programming No 3 digits 1234 PROGRAM PAUSE Note means default value throughout this manual Programming Structure Programming OXX Basic Programming Frequently used programming steps 1 XX System Programming Global system parameters 2XX Time Programming Flexible system timers 3XX TRS Barring ARS TRS Barring and Automatic Route Programming Selection ARS 400 Trunk Programming Setting of trunk
138. Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX Feature Guide moder KX TDASO KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Version 1 0 Introduction 2 About this Feature Guide This Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall feature reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX It explains what this PBX can do and how to obtain the most out of its many features and facilities This manual contains the following sections Section 1 Call Handling Features Provides details about the call handling features Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features Provides details about the system configuration and administration features Section 3 Programming Provides system programming instructions Section 4 Appendix Provides tables listing capacity of system resources and tones and ring tones It also provides the list of abbreviations Index Provide feature titles important words to help you access the required information easily Terms used in this Feature Guide Installation Manual References The required installation instruction titles described in the Installation Manual are noted for your reference Feature Guide References The related feature titles described in this Feature Guide are noted for your reference User Manual R
139. RY nnns 177 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CIAO 181 Advice of Charge AOG T ERE 183 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN PMP 184 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN gt 186 MANN gt E 188 Call Transfer CT by IDN 189 Malicious Call Identification MCID 190 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CB 191 ENE Ne 192 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol 194 E1 Line Service Features KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 195 E1 Line Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 195 T1 Line Service Features KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 197 T1 Line Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 197 Voice Mail i i ELO aaa EAR 199 NE Mail VMI Group mp 199 Voice Mail DI MF Integration 203 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integoraton 210 Portable Station PS 68 215 Por
140. Remote Not available Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Not available Trunk Group Access no Not available Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no Not available PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Not available Code Feature Guide 27 1 1 Incoming Call Features 28 This is applied only when a trunk call arrives on a DISA line but the line is busy at that time Once the call reaches the destination extension by using the DISA feature the Intercept Routing feature of the extension works Each of them can have different intercept destinations for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service Available Intercept Destination Intercept Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX 0 Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Availability Bsa GP oe o Analogue 1SDN Remote Maintenance v Idle Line Access no Phoneno Geseent BER Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Conditions e Intercept Routing Busy DND on off Each Intercept Routing Busy and Intercept Routing DND can be enabled or disabled through system programming If disabled one of the following is activated d
141. TER b NEXT Page up TRS Barring Level 501 501 Deel Clever gt G gt 1 Day 2 Lunch 01 64 1 7 END ENTER 3 Break 4 Night ENTER Trunk Call Duration Limitation 502 502 rer COSNo gt DO gt gt ID 01 64 Disable END ENTER EE ENTER Call Transfer to Trunk 503 SELECT 01 64 Disable Enable ENTER 503 gt ex cosno gt OD rer END ENTER Call Forwarding to Trunk 504 504 gt r COSNo gt OD gt 9 gt 01 64 i ENTER E ENTER 346 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Executive Busy Override 505 505 gt e COSNo SP rer Disable END ENTER MEN Enable ENTER Executive Busy Override Deny 506 506 gt l sho gt ER l gt m 01 64 Disable END ENTER Enable ENTER DND Override 507 507 gt er 05 0 gt OD gt gt m 01 64 Disable END ENTER Enable ENTER Account Code Mode 508 508 gt e gt COSNo gt P re gt um 01 64 Option ENTER Forced ENTER TRS Barring Level for System Speed Dialling 509 509 gt COSNo TRS Barring Level er DO END 01 64 1 7 ENTER ENTER TRS Barring Level for Extension Lock 510 510 gt r COSNo gt TRS Barring Level J gt lt gt gt C 1 7 a END ENTER a ENTER Manager Assignment 511 511 gt er COSN gt SP re gt m 01 64 Disable Enabl ENTER isable Enable ENTER Feature Guide 347 3 3 PT Programmi
142. TVP series DTMF Integration can be connected C Super Hybrid Port With the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 DPT APT DSS Console KX TVS TVP series or SLT can be connected With the KX TDA30 DPT APT DSS Console KX TVS TVP series SLT or CS can be connected EXtra Device Port XDP of Super Hybrid Ports A DPT and SLT can be connected to one super hybrid port TR SLT HL DPT In this case the SLT port TR of the super hybrid port can be used as an XDP port to connect an SLT as a SU b telephone There are two modes for the XDP port as follows m de Geet gt Parallel Mode The DPT and SLT have the same extension number so that they can act as one extension They use the main telephone s DPT s extension data e g extension number COS 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone The DPT and SLT have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions To use XDP mode XDP mode must be enabled on the port through system programming EXtra Device Port XDP Mode 600 Conditions Feature Guide Automatic Detection on Super Hybrid Port With the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 a DPT APT or SLT can be connected to a super hybrid port without programming With the KX TDA30 a DPT APT SLT or CS can be connected to a super hybrid port without programming A DSS Console or a VPS Panasonic KX TVS TVP series DPT Digital Integration can also be connected with an SLT in XDP mode APT and SLT
143. Transfer CT by ISDN Description An ISDN call can be transferred to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature without occupying a second ISDN line This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 369 Explicit Call Transfer ECT supplementary service Conditions The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis If an ISDN port is in P P configuration this feature can be used only when the network supports the explicit linkage option Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible 1 11 1 Call Transfer The call charges after completing this feature will not be recorded by the PBX User Manual References User Manual 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer Feature Guide 189 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 1 8 Malicious Call Identification MCID Description An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a malicious caller during a call or while hearing reorder tone after the caller hangs up Information on the malicious call will be received later on This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 130 Malicious Call Identification MCID supplementary
144. VELGE SV 242 1 27 2 Virtual Private Network VPDN nnne nnns 261 vere SOGN lee EEN 263 19751 QSIG Network SUMMARY crs aidieci idis danse are axer sese UU buniietndcavescastieguieadinwece add c cd ERA 263 1 27 3 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by OI 265 1 27 33 Call Forwarding CFP QSIG E 267 1 2734 Call Transfer C T Dy OSIG sirenes aea ua Ectue a aae E uuo O dide a up i ndn ae Laut cuc eig uud bone 269 1 27 3 5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by OG 271 1 27 4 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP hNetwork 272 1 28 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features 273 1 28 1 Computer Telephony Integration 7 273 2 System Configuration and Administration Features 275 2 1 System Configuration Hardware rrnnuunnnnvennnnnnnnnuennnnnnnnnnennnnvnnnnnennnnnennnnennnnr 276 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration 276 2 2 System Configuration Software rranuurnnnvennnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvennnnennnnnnnnnnennnnr 27
145. VPS is connected to the SLT ports of the PBX These SLT ports as well as VM DTMF Group settings must be configured to allow DTMF Integration as shown in the following Programming Example of Extension Port and Programming Example of VM DTMF Group VM DPT Group Assignment The VPS is connected to the DPT ports of the PBX These DPT ports as well as VM DPT group settings must be configured to allow DPT Digital Integration as shown in the following Programming Example of Extension Port and Programming Example of VM DPT Group 1 22 Voice Mail Features Programming Example of Extension Port DPT Property Port Type Unit No Port No IT EE sje per so WD 2 ENEE EE AS Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable 6 1 SIT 401 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable 6 2 SLT 402 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable gt Terminal Device Assignment 601 VM DPT Group 1 VM DPT Group 2 VM DTMF Group 1 VM DTMF Group 2 Programming Example of VM DTMF Group Floating Extension No of VM DTMF Group Service Port Connected to Extension VPSP Group No No Name Mode ort 1 380 CompayC AA 301 302 2 40 CompayD VM 40 402 Programming Example of VM DPT Group VM DPT Group No
146. Waiting tone Call Waiting Call Waiting tone disabled tone Enable Call Waiting Call Waiting tone OHCA Whisper OHCA disabled or Call Waiting or Call Waiting tone tone e The notification receiving methods Call Waiting tone OHCA and Whisper OHCA are available when the called extension is having a conversation with other party If not the calling extension will be kept waiting until the called extension becomes available to receive the notification Even while waiting the calling extension will hear a ringback tone e f none of these notification receiving methods Call Waiting tone OHCA or Whisper OHCA is set at the called party the caller will hear reorder tone Feature Guide 95 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting User Manual References User Manual 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 96 Feature Guide 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 4 2 Call Waiting Tone Description When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension ringing or having a conversation the Call Waiting tone can be sent to the called extension to let him know another call is waiting Conditions e This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call Waiting If it is activated the calling extension will hear a ringback tone e Call Waiting tone can be selected Tone 1 or Tone 2 through personal programming Call Waiting Tone Type Sel
147. able used for the Automatic Switching mode The Start and or End time of each mode can be set for each day of the week The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively Feature Guide 285 2 2 System Configuration Software 286 3 Feature Guide Time Table Example Time Table No Tenant No EE ee 1t00 08 MON Day 1 start 08 00 11 00 08 00 12 00 NONE 16 00 12 00 Day 2 start NONE NONE Break 1 end Day restart NONE Night start NONE TUE 08 00 18 00 NONE Break 1 start NONE NONE NONE NEE Time Service Image of Monday and Tuesday 20 00 24 00 08 00 Features Using Time Service The following features can be set in each time mode day lunch break night a Destination of incoming trunk calls DIL DID DDI MSN 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features b Destination of the Intercept Routing 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing C Queuing Time Table for incoming call distribution groups 1 2 2 3 Queuing Feature d Overflow destination for incoming call distribution groups 1 2 2 5 Overflow Feature e Destination of incoming doorphone calls 1 15 1 Doorphone Call f PBX operator 2 2 5 Operator Features g COS for TRS Barring and for Trunk Access h Outgoing Message OGM for Timed Reminder 1 25 4 Timed Reminder Programming Examples of DID DDI Table and DIL Table DID DDI table can be programmed for each DID DDI number and a tenant
148. absence where he is on his telephone When display PT user calls the extension the message is shown on the caller s telephone The following messages can be programmed as desired nee Absent Message G i Absent Message 008 At Ext Extension They are used for every Number extension user commonly Hour Minute Out until Month Day In a Meeting Personal A message is programmable at message each extension through personal programming Personal Absent Message which can only be used by that extension user The 96 means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension Up to seven 5 can be stored for each message Conditions e An extension user can select only one message at a time The selected message is displayed at the extension while on hook User Manual References User Manual 1 5 2 Showing a Message on the Caller s Telephone Display Absent Message 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 166 Feature Guide 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 18 1 Fixed Buttons Description PTs DSS Consoles and Add on Key Modules are provided with the following feature Line Access buttons Depending on your device type some buttons may not be provided As for buttons on PSs please refer to the Operating Instructions for each PS PT and Add on Key Module Used to adjust the ringer
149. ailable To use the MSN whose last digit is 0 as an individual MSN system programming is required for each ISDN port Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Feature Guide 193 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 1 11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Description ISDN provides some supplementary services by key protocol and they may require a service access code to be dialled This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 122 Generic keypad protocol for the support of supplementary service ISDN Service Access Conditions e ISDN Service Button A flexible button can be customised as an ISDN Service button service access code can also be assigned on this button for a quick operation e This feature is not available to an SLT Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 2 5 Accessing the ISDN Service ISDN Service Access 194 Feature Guide 1 20 E1 Line Service Features KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 1 20 E1 Line Service Features KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 1 20 1 E1 Line Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only Description The E1 line carries thirty 64 kbps voice channels at 2 048 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation PCM 1 Channel Type DR2 Digital Syst
150. ake calls to Tenant 3 itself only An incoming call distribution group must belong to one tenant because the following features are determined on a tenant basis 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY Music on Hold while a call is waiting in the queue The Time Table which determines the overflow destination 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 4 Time Service Description This PBX supports day night lunch and break modes of operation TRS Barring can be arranged separately The destination of incoming calls can be set differently for each mode 1 Time Service Switching Mode Day lunch break night mode can be switched either automatically or manually gt Time Service Switching Mode 101 The switching mode can be assigned for each tenant The switching mode can also be changed by pressing the Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual button This can be performed by only an extension assigned as the manager or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis Time Service Manual Switching 514 The PBX will switch mode according to the preprogrammed Time Table Service Manual Switching 514 can switch mode by dialling the feature number or pressing the Time Service button mill A manager or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis Time Even while in the Automatic Switching mode day lunch break night mode can be changed manually 2 Time Table Each tenant has a Time T
151. all is made callback ringing will inform the caller when the line becomes free using this feature After the extension answers the callback ringing the dialled number is automatically redialled Conditions e If the callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds the callback is cancelled e If the extension hears busy tone before dialling the telephone number only the trunk or trunk group is reserved After answering the callback ringing the extension should dial the telephone number e An extension can set only one Automatic Callback Busy The last setting is effective e Multiple extension users can set this feature to one trunk simultaneously However a maximum of four extension users can set this feature to one extension e The priority of the callback is the setting order e This feature cannot be used for calls to a VPS or an ISDN extension User Manual References User Manual 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 92 Feature Guide 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override Description Allows an extension user to interrupt an existing call to establish a three party conference call Executive Busy Override Deny It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being intercepted by another extension user Conditions e COS programming determines extension users who can use the Executive Busy Override Executive Busy Override 505 and
152. an be performed PC programming is described in Section 3 2 PC Programming e PT Proprietary Telephone Programming A subset of system programming can be performed PT programming is described in Section 3 3 PT Programming The extension user can programme by entering 3 digits programming numbers from the PT Password Security A password is required to perform programming for security purposes Do not disclose the password This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password 1 Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers 2 Please maintain the secrecy of the password This will avoid unauthorised access and possible dial through fraud 3 Please change the password periodically 4 Westrongly recommend that a password of 10 digits is used for maximum protection against hackers 5 If the system password is forgotten you can examine the backup of the system programming Therefore please keep your backup secure to avoid unauthorised access e If you have a backup of the system data you can find the password by loading the backup system data onto the PC and check the password using the programming tool For how to back up the system data refer to Section 3 3 4 Hybrid IP PBX Maintenance for KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 7 3 4 Hybrid IP PBX Maintenance for KX TDA30 in the Installation Manual e f you do not ha
153. an incoming call Release Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer Toll Restriction Call Barring Used to change the TRS Barring level of other extension users temporarily ISDN Service Used to access an ISDN service Calling Line Identification Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR service Restriction CLIR Connected Line Used to switch between the COLP and COLR service Identification Restriction COLR ISDNHold Used to transfer a call using the telephone company Headset Used to turn on off the headset mode while idle Used to switch between hands free mode and headset modes during a conversation Time Service Switching Used to switch between the Automatic Switching and Manual Mode Automatic Manual Switching mode Two way Record Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox Two way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension One touch Two way Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified Transfer extension with one touch Live Call Screening LCS Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is leaving a message and if desired intercept the call Voice Mail VM Transfer Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension One touch Feature Setting Buttons Pressing these buttons while on hook changes the feature settings The new mode will be
154. ance Notice 1 During a long programming session it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data to the SD Memory Card You can think of system data as stored in RAM whereas SD Memory Card as stored on a hard disk If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or system reset for some reason all the system data in RAM will be lost To save the system data to the SD Memory Card 1 click the SD Memory Backup icon before resetting the PBX or turning off the power or 2 exit the Maintenance Console so that the PBX starts automatically saving the system data 2 When the PBX is initialised not all data is taken from the SD Memory Card The data for present status of extension FWD DND buttons is taken from battery backup memory in the PBX Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming CAUTION Do not remove the SD Memory Card during access to it Doing so will damage the system data and in the worst case damage the SD Memory Card Feature Guide 319 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 1 Programming Instructions Required Telephone Extension A PT with multiline display e g KX T7636 6 line display is required for the system programming The extension must be in a COS permitted System Programming or the extension connected to the smallest port number System programming allows only one extension user to enter at a time Buttons and Functions Fixed Buttons T7600 T7200 T7400 T7500 SURED
155. ance modem 2 3 1 PC Programming NA Not answered call 10 Shows the call charge Programmable Items mem JL DewHpkn Outgoing trunk call Controls whether the outgoing trunk calls are shown This setting is common throughout the PBX SMDR Outgoing Call Printing 804 COS programming is also required Incoming trunk call Controls whether the incoming trunk calls are shown SMDR Incoming Call Printing 805 Outgoing intercom Controls whether the outgoing intercom calls are recorded call Log in Log out Controls whether the log in log out status is recorded status Controls whether the user dialled number or the modified number is shown The Host PBX Access code followed by the access code can be shown as supplementary information only when the modified number is selected in this setting 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Caller s Controls whether the caller s identification number name identification number and name or nothing is shown If none is selected lt l gt will not be shown DID DDI number Controls whether the DID DDI number name number and name or nothing is shown If none is selected D will not be shown 228 Feature Guide 1 24 Administrative Information Output Features m esoe Secret dialling Controls secret dialling If enabled the dialled number will be shown as dots This setting is effective only when the modified number is selected in
156. and USB Module still cannot be used with the master DPT To use them the DPT must be disconnected from the PBX and then reconnected DPT DPT SLT When an SLT is connected to the slave DPT in parallel mode the SLT works as the parallel extension of the master DPT Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 7 2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions 2 7 3 Extra Device Port XDP Connection lt KX TDA30 gt 6 6 2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions 6 6 3 Extra Device Port XDP Connection 6 6 4 Digital Extra Device Port Digital XDP Connection User Manual References User Manual 1 7 11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring Parallelled Telephone Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Description The Calling Party Control CPC signal is an on hook indication disconnect signal sent from the analogue trunk when the other party is hung up To maintain efficient utilisation of trunks the PBX monitors their state and when CPC signal is detected from a line the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension with reorder tone Conditions e CPC signal detection is programmable for incoming trunk calls c LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Incoming 414 and for outgoing trunk calls c LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing 413 e f your telephone company sends signals similar to CPC it is rec
157. ase Description After going off hook if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period the user will hear reorder tone This operation applies to intercom calls only This feature is also known as Automatic Station Release Conditions e APT PS user hears reorder tone for a preprogrammed time period and then the PT PS goes back to the idle status automatically However an SLT user will just hear reorder tone until he goes on hook e This feature works in one of the following cases When making an intercom call a The first digit has not been dialled within a preprogrammed time period b After a digitis dialled if subsequent digits are not dialled within a preprogrammed time period Feature Guide 69 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 3 70 Intercom Call Description An extension user can call another extension user Conditions Extension Number Name Assignment Extension numbers Extension Number 003 and names Extension Name 004 are assigned to all extensions The assigned number and name are shown on display PTs during intercom calls DSS Button It is possible to access another extension with one touch by pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection DSS button A flexible button can be customised as a DSS button Call Directory Extension Dialling Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored names on the display Alternate Receiving Ring Vo
158. ate directory of feature names and numbers Quick Dialling Makes a call or accesses a feature easily by selecting from a private directory of names and numbers 220 Feature Guide 1 23 Portable Station PS Features 1 23 4 PS Feature Buttons Description A PS user can use PBX feature using a combination of buttons button a specified number X or and or display operation The flexible buttons and the display are customised through PS programming The button assignment is the same for PT gt 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons Some special feature buttons e g WAVESEARCH button may be customised depending on the PS type Feature Guide 221 1 23 Portable Station PS Features 1 23 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 222 Description APS can be used in parallel with a wired telephone PT SLT In this case the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone When Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is enabled the two telephones share one extension number main telephone s extension number like XDP Parallel mode for a DPT and an SLT Cell Station XDP Parallel Mode Wireless XDP i TIN Parallel Mode SG 4 QS gt DPT Wireless Phone PT SLT PS Extn 102 Extn 103 Conditions Feature Guide If one of the telephones goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call the call is switched to the telephone going off hook However the call is not switched in one of the following conditions
159. atic Route Selection ARS Features Example Dialled Corresponding Description Number Routing Plan Table No H 039 123 4567 1 039 is found in location 0001 and seven digits assigned additional remain number of digits in location 0001 were dialled The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected just after the seventh digit 039 654 321 1 039 is found in location 0001 and the Inter digit time expired before the seventh digit is received The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected after the Inter digit time expired 038 4 03 is found in two locations locations 0001 and 0002 so the PBX waits for the next digit 8 038 is not found in any location then 03 location 0002 is selected The Routing Plan Table 4 is selected 03 4 The Inter digit time expired after receiving 3 03 is found in location 0002 The Routing Plan Table 4 is selected after the Inter digit time expired 4 Routing Plan Table Assignment Arrange the time schedule as desired and store the carrier priority Time Table As the best carrier may vary with the day of the week and the time of day four time blocks Time A through D can be programmed for each day of the week Carrier Priority Assign the appropriate carrier refer to 5 Carrier Table Assignment and their priority in each time block The carrier is selected in the entry order the order in which entries are listed 3 ARS Leading Number Table Location Leading Routin
160. ating extension numbers of the incoming call distribution groups so that the VPS can create mailboxes with this data automatically FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS incoming calls are forwarded to the VPS 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD The PBX sends a mailbox number of the forwarding extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing If the Intercept to Mailbox setting is enabled through system programming the PBX sends the mailbox number of the intercepted extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension 1 11 1 Call Transfer The extension user should use the Voice Mail VM Transfer button when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension number with the required command after the VPS answe
161. ature Guide References 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 78 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 8 Special Carrier Access Code Description If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies a Special Carrier Access code assigned through system programming Special Carrier Access Code 303 is required every time when a trunk call is made A preprogrammed Pause time gt LCOT Pause Time 416 will be automatically inserted between the user dialled Special Carrier Access code and the following digits 1 5 4 6 Pause Insertion Conditions e TRS Barring TRS Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Special Carrier Access code 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX A Special Carrier Access code and a Host PBX Access code should be assigned separately these codes cannot be assigned together as one code 1 5 4 7 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Feature Guide 79 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 5 Seizing a Line Features 1 5 5 1 Seizing a Line Features SUMMARY Description An extension user can select the line seized for making calls by the following methods rom Dew Soen Line Preference A user can select the line seized when going 1 5 5 2 Line Outgoing off hook Preference Outgoing Trunk Access A user can select
162. ature uses a PC Console or PC Phone the alarm information will be sent to the preprogrammed party via the PC Console or PC Phone The PC Console and PC Phone use e mail to send the information e The alarm information will be recorded on the SMDR if enabled through system programming e The PBX can be automatically diagnosed at a preprogrammed time everyday Feature Guide Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 4 1 5 Troubleshooting by Error Log lt KX TDA30 gt 8 1 5 Troubleshooting by Error Log Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics Feature Guide 311 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 312 Feature Guide Section 3 Programming Instructions Feature Guide 313 3 1 Introduction 3 1 Introduction 3 1 1 Introduction These Programming Instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX The PBX has a default setting You can change the default to meet your requirements System programming controls the PBX features described in this Feature Guide It allows the PBX to be customised to the requirements Only one person can programme at a time Another person trying to enter programming mode will be rejected Ways to Programme There are two programming methods e PC Personal Computer Programming All system programming c
163. b Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it c Change the PIN frequently e Manager Password One manager password can be assigned per PBX Manager Password 112 User Manual References User Manual 2 1 Control Features 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 291 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 1 PC Programming Description This PBX can be programmed and administered using a personal computer PC There are two programming methods 1 On site Programming System programming diagnosis can be performed locally by connecting a PC to the PBX directly 2 Remote Programming System programming diagnosis and data upload can be performed from a remote location 1 On site Programming Method Description Using the Serial Interface RS 232C The PBX has a Serial Interface RS 232C port which can be used for either system administration or SMDR 1 24 1 port Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Using the USB port The PC is connected to the USB port on the PBX or a USB port USB Module attached to a DPT Using the LAN A CTI LINK card must be installed interface KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only Using a modem An RMT card must be installed Assign the floating extension through an SLT port number of the analogue remote maintenance Modem Floating Extension Number 811 and dial this number from the PC to connect to the PBX Using an ISDN TA
164. back Busy CCBS PS users cannot use the following features Personal Speed Dialling OGM playback record S CO Line Access Parallel Telephone Mode set cancel Walking Extension BGM set cancel Timed Reminder User Manual References User Manual Feature Guide 4 2 1 Feature Number Table 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 6 Floating Extension Description Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them appear as extensions These numbers are defined as floating extension numbers and can be assigned as a destination of incoming calls etc This feature is also known as Floating Station Resource Description Device External Pager Used as the destination for TAFAS feature gt External Pager Floating Extension Number 700 gt 1 15 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Outgoing Message Used to send messages for DISA feature gt Outgoing OGM Message OGM Floating Extension Number 730 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Analogue Remote Used to access the PC programming mode through a Maintenance modem on a personal computer Modem Floating Extension Number 811 ISDN Remote Used to access the PC programming mode through the Maintenance ISDN interface on a personal computer ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number 812 Incoming Call Used to call an incoming call distribution group Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribut
165. box Number 3 VM Service a b Feature Guide FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a Call is forwarded from an extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number FWD to the VPS Sequence Selection If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS any incoming call will be forwarded to the VPS It is also possible to send the AA command even in the VM service mode when calls are forwarded so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox This can be performed by selecting AA through system programming Transmitted Command aramot Transmitted Command In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Answer by Switching to VM command Recording message command Mailbox Recording message command H H Mailbox Nol Default 6 H H Mailbox No Ad o Switching to AA command 8 Switching to AA command 8 Noe DTMF commands are not sent Work with default of the VPS Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a trunk call is intercepted from an extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Selection If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS
166. call through an ISDN line e Anincoming call through an analogue line with Caller ID which includes the time information The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday with the first call after 3 05 AM if enabled through system programming Note If the Timed Reminder Wake up call is set the setting will not happen or will ring twice depending on the adjustment Conditions e SMDR will record the call information using the PBX clock so that the recording time will be overlapped at the end of summer time 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 298 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control Feature Guide References 1 19 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 25 4 Timed Reminder Feature Guide 299 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 5 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering Description To dial another extension user or to access PBX features the access numbers extension numbers or feature numbers are required There are three types of numbering plans 1 Flexible Numbering available while a dial tone is heard 2 Flexible Numbering available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard 3 Fixed Numbering available while dialling or talking 1 Flexible Numbering available while a dial tone is heard Extension numbers and feature numbers which are available while a dial tone is heard can be customised for easy use gt Flexible Numbering 100 The numbers must not conflict It is also p
167. call with the caller s information e g Caller ID is directed to an extension the information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension This information is shown on the telephone display and is used for confirming the caller calling back or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Dialling Example John White Caller s name 20 digits max 123456789 Caller s number 16 digits max 12 Dec 10 00AM MON Date and time of a call received Not Answered Answering Status Call Log buttons CL Own extension CL Incoming call distribution group NZ NZ Conditions Call Log Button A flexible button can be customised as the Call Log button for the extension or an incoming call distribution group The button light shows the current status as follows Light pattern Status Redon There is unchecked information All information has been checked If the answering destination is not the original extension FWD No Answer and Call Pickup If a call is forwarded because of no answer or another extension picks up the call the information is logged in the call logs of both the original destination and the answering destination Call Log for Incoming Call Distribution Group Calls If a call for an incoming call distribution group is not answered the information is logged in the call log for the incoming call distribution group If it is answered the information is logged in t
168. characters 4 10 characters Administrator for PC 4 10 characters 4 10 characters 4 10 characters Programming Programming System Password for Administrator for PT 4 10 digits 4 10 digits 4 10 digits Programming System Password for User for PT 4 10 digits 4 10 digits 4 10 digits Programming Manager Password 4 10 digits 4 10 digits 4 10 digits Installer Level 4 16 characters 4 16 characters 4 16 characters Programmer Code Administrator Level AAG characters 4 16 characters 4 16 characters Programmer Code User Level 0 16 characters 0 16 characters 0 16 characters Programmer Code Programmer Code 366 Feature Guide 4 2 Tones Ring Tones 4 2 Tones Ring Tones 4 2 4 Tones Ring Tones Tone Patterns Default Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Confirmation Tone 4 Confirmation Tone 5 Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3 Dial Tone 4 Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone 1 Ringback Tone 2 DND Tone Trunk Call Limit Warning Tone Feature Guide 367 4 2 Tones Ring Tones Tone Patterns Default we 15s gt Hold Alarm Tone Call Waiting Tone 1 Call Waiting Tone 2 Ring Tone Patterns Default 1s Single Double Triple S Double 368 Feature Guide 4 3 List of Abbreviations 4 3 4 3 1 List of Abbreviations A AA Automated Attendant
169. code 952 due to the COS assignment of the trunk groups of PBX 2 Case 2 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 DISA floating extension number of PBX 2 verified code entry feature number X verified code verified code personal identification number PIN Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 Thecall overrides the COS assignment of the trunk groups of PBX 2 and the call is connected to the outside party 01 23 4567 through PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 Feature Guide 255 1 27 Networking Features d FWD Call Transfer Intercept Routing to the Trunk Example Telephone Company E m eS m emo SS Fr Et OR Ae Forwarded Transferred Trunk Intercepted to 01 23 4567 Trunk TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 um Je Extn 1011 Extn 1011 01 23 4567 Dials 7 952 1011 pareille P Outside Party Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 and extension number 1011 2 The call reaches the destination extension 1011 of PBX 2 through the TIE line and the call is forwarded transferred or intercepted to the outside party 01 23 4567 through the trunk 256 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features 3 3 Trunk to TIE to Trunk Access An outside caller can be connected to an outside party through the
170. coming Call Features 14 Incoming Call Indication Features 34 Incoming Call Indication Features SUMMARY 34 Incoming Call Log 161 Incoming Call Log Display Lock 161 Incoming Call Queue Monitor 54 Incoming Trunk Call Features 14 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY 14 Installation Manual References 2 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 177 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 177 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 177 Intercept Routing 27 Intercept Routing Busy DND 27 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA 27 Intercept Routing No Destination 30 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group 50 Intercept Time 203 331 Intercom Call 70 Internal Call Block 32 Internal Call Features 31 Internal Call Features SUMMARY 31 Interrupt Redial 88 Introduction 314 IRNA gt Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA 27 ISDN Centrex Service 179 ISDN Extension 192 ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number 812 361 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol 194 ISDN gt Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 177 Itemised Billing Code 115 L Last Number Redial 88 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time lncoming 414 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing 413 LCOT Dialling Mode 410 337 LCOT Disconnect Time 418 340 LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration 412 LCOT Flash Recall Time 417 339 LCOT Pau
171. cted Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 181 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG 265 Calling Connected Line Identification Restriction CLIR COLR 182 Capacity of System Resources 364 Card Programming 362 CCBS gt Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 191 CCBS gt Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG 271 CF gt Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 184 CF gt Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 186 Index CF Call Forwarding CF by QSIG 267 Charge Margin 010 327 Charge Meter 231 Charge Rate per Unit 012 327 Charge Tax 011 9327 Circular Hunting 38 Class of Service COS 278 Class of Service 602 349 CLI gt Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 25 CLIP gt Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 156 CLIP gt Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG 265 CLIP COLP Number 606 350 CLIR gt Calling Connected Line Identification Restriction CLIR COLR 182 266 CNIP gt Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG 265 CNIR gt Calling Connected Name Identification Restriction CNIR CONR 266 COLP gt Calling
172. d Conditions Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group e If the Overflow time expires and the overflow destination is unavailable a Ifthe trunk call arrives through the LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card 1 The line is disconnected when the call was once in a queue and an outgoing message OGM was sent to the call or when the call reached an incoming call distribution group by using the DISA feature 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 Except for the above redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again b If the call arrives through the other cards Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again Busy on Busy e If a trunk call arrives through the LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card busy tone will not be sent to the caller Feature Guide References 1 2 2 3 Queuing Feature Feature Guide 51 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 6 Log in Log out Description Incoming call distribution group members can join Log in or leave Log out the groups manually They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extensions They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls Wrap up While logged in a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call Wrap up time While Wrap up timer is active calls to all incoming cal
173. data Flash ROM on the CS Conditions e The software version of the MPR can be confirmed through system programming Main Processing MPR Software Version Reference 190 Installation Manual References Installation Manual KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 1 MPR Card 306 Feature Guide 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 1 Power Failure Transfer Description When the power supply to the PBX fails specific SLTs and or ISDN terminal devices are automatically connected to specific trunks Power Failure Connections The PBX will switch from normal operation to the Power Failure Connections and all existing conversations will be disconnected Only the trunks handled by Power Failure Connections can be used during a power failure Conditions General Only trunk calls can be made during a power failure All other features do not work DC Power Source If the DC power is available from backup batteries even if the AC power fails the PBX will remain fully operational KX TDA100 KX TDA200 The analogue trunk cards and extension cards and the number of ports which can be used for Power Failure Connections are as follows Trunk Cards LCOT16 four ports and LCOT8 two ports Extension Cards MSLC16 four ports SLC16 four ports DHLC8 two ports and SLC8 two ports To each trunk card connect only one extension card Note Power Failure Connections between analogue trun
174. de PIN for each Required 1 8 6 Verified Code verified code Code Entry Personal Identificati Clears the extension PIN of an Required e 1 25 1 PIN Clear extension remotely and a verified Extension code PIN PIN Lock is also unlocked Personal Identification Number PIN e 1 8 6 Verified Code Entry Remote Sets or cancels the Extension Lock Required e 1 8 3 Extension on an extension remotely Extension Lock Lock Dial Tone Transfer Changes the TRS Barring level of the Not e 1 8 4 Dial extension temporarily required Tone Transfer Example An extension user can call a manager to release the restricted outgoing call e g international call Outgoing Message Records and plays back outgoing Not e 1 15 5 OGM messages OGMs required Outgoing Message OGM Time Service Switches the time mode day lunch 10 e 2 2 4 Time break night manually required Service BGM External Sets the External BGM on and off Not e 1 15 4 required Background Music BGM 290 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software Conditions WARNING When a third party discovers the personal identification number PIN verified code PIN extension PIN of the PBX there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line and the cost will be charged to your own account In order to avoid this problem we strongly recommend the following points a Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN
175. destination after the call reached the PBX once When the CFU has been set the network forwards the call directly to the preprogrammed destination This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service Example lt FWD gt lt Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP gt ISDN MSN 123 4567 CFU Destination 01 23 4567 4 I MSN 123 4567 987 6543 Outside Party Outside Caller Outside Party 01 23 4567 01 23 4567 Dials 123 4567 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 MSN 123 4567 Forward Destination of Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 Feature Guide 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Conditions e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e The feature requires the MSN service 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service e COS programming determines the extensions that are able to use this feature Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD User Manual References User Manual 1 5 1 Forwarding Calls Feature Guide 185 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Description An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature when the call is
176. displayed for a preprogrammed time period Conditions e The Flexible DSS button lights of the KX T7040 and KX T7240 shows only Off or Red On If the button is customised as a button which shows other light patterns the other light patterns also show only as Red On Feature Guide 171 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features User Manual References User Manual 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons 172 Feature Guide 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 18 3 LED Indication Description The light LED Light Emitting Diode of the Message Ringer Lamp and following buttons Line Status Buttons and Corresponding Extension Status Button show line conditions with a variety of light patterns Line Status Buttons S CO G CO L CO INTERCOM ICD Group Corresponding Extension Status Button DSS 1 Light Pattern of the Message Ringer Lamp e Incoming call from a trunk Red flashing e Incoming call from another extension Green flashing e Message s present no incoming call Red on e No Message s present no incoming call Off 2 Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons Line Status Incoming Call Button ntercom Distribution Light Status G CO L CO INTERCOM ICD Group This extension is using the line Grenen green This extension is holding the line flashing Moderate This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Hold green or using the line for an Unattended Conference
177. e Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has listened to messages stored in his mailbox 1 22 Voice Mail Features Performance of Pressing the MESSAGE Button Transmitted Command In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Switching to VM command Listening message command Listening message command XH H Mailbox No 6 XH H Mailbox No Example Sent 6 se p 102 L Listening message command mailbox number Pressing the Switching to VM command MESSAGE button Extn 102 VPS In AA y service mode Mailbox for Extn 102 AA Service If the VPS transfers the call using the AA service the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called destination with the preprogrammed DTMF status signal so that the VPS can confirm the status of the extension without listening to the system tones e g ringback tone Assign the DTMF status signal to suit the VPS settings The DTMF Status Signal and Condition HBT ringback The PBX is ringing the corresponding tone extension BT busy tone The called extension is busy ROT reorder tone The dialled number is invalid DND DND tone The called extension has set DND 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND FWD VM RBT The called extension has set FWD to FWD to Voice Mail VPS and the PBX is calling another port ringback tone of the VPS FWD VM BT FWD The called extension has set FWD to to Voice Mail busy VPS a
178. e The Alarm Ringing Duration time the number of alarm repeat times and intervals are programmable through system programming e To use the voice message feature The MSG card is required and the message must be recorded An extension assigned as the manager can record messages 1 15 5 Outgoing Message OGM The different message can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night gt 2 2 4 Time Service Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 6 5 MSG4 Card lt KX TDA30 gt 6 5 4 MSG2 Card User Manual References User Manual 1 7 1 Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder 238 Feature Guide 1 25 Extension Controlling Features 1 25 5 Remote Extension Control by User Description A user can remotely change the feature settings e g FWD and time service mode for his own extension from inside or outside the PBX using DISA 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA This feature can be used only on the extensions which are allowed to be controlled remotely on a COS basis The following features are available a FWD DND 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND b Log in Log out 1 2 2 6 Log in Log out C Absent Message 1 17 2 Absent Message d Extension Lock 1 8 3 Extension Lock e Time Service Switching Mode 2 2 4 Time Service This feature is also known as Remote Station Control by User Conditions e Extension PIN An extens
179. e FWD destination 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Remote Extension Lock Overrides Extension Lock If an extension assigned as the manager sets Remote Extension Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user the user cannot unlock it If a manager extension unlocks an extension that has been locked by the extension user the extension will be unlocked This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control TRS Barring Level COS programming determines the TRS Barring level for Extension Lock TRS Barring Level for Extension Lock 510 User Manual References User Manual Feature Guide 1 5 3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Lock 2 1 1 Extension Control 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 4 Dial Tone Transfer Description An extension assigned as the manager can change the TRS Barring level 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring for the extension user temporarily After that the extension user can make his call Example An extension user can call a manager to release the restriction on outgoing call e g international calls 3 Make a trunk call 2 Change TI TRS Barring level wech CJ 4 3 E Toll Restriction See 1 Call eoe Call Barring button Guest Room Manager Trunk call restricted Conditions e The changed level effects just one time e Toll Restriction Call Barring But
180. e Features 80 Seizing a Line Features SUMMARY 80 Sequences in Queuing Time Table 631 352 Slot Card Deletion 901 362 Slot Card Reset 902 362 Slot Card Type Reference 900 SMDR amp Maintenance Programming SMDR Incoming Call Printing 805 SMDR Outgoing Call Printing 804 SMDR Page Length 802 360 SMDR Skip Perforation 803 361 SMDR gt Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Software Upgrading 306 Special Carrier Access Code 79 Special Carrier Access Code 303 333 Speed Dialling Personal System 89 Station Hunting gt Idle Extension Hunting 38 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 225 Station Password Lock gt Extension PIN Lock 234 Station Programme Clear gt Extension Feature Clear Station Speed Dialling gt Personal Speed Dialling 89 Subaddressing 192 Subaddressing SUB 178 Supervisory Feature 54 System Configuration and Administration Features system Configuration Hardware 276 System Configuration Software 278 system Data Control 292 system Password for Administrator for PT Programming 110 239 106 360 360 360 360 362 360 361 361 225 236 275 329 System Password for User for PT Programming 111 9329 System Programming 328 System Requirements 315 325 325 System Speed Dialling Name 002 System Speed Dialling Number 001 376 Feature Guide T T1 Line Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 197 T1 Line Service Features KX TDA100 KX TD
181. e Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 6 Verified Code Entry Description An extension user can make a trunk call with a verified code from his own or any other extension to change the TRS Barring level 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes A verified code personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature Conditions WARNING When third party discovers the personal identification number PIN verified code PIN extension PIN of the PBX there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line and the cost will be charged to your own account In order to avoid this problem we strongly recommend the following points a Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN b Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it c Change the PIN frequently e The following items are applied COS programming Budget Management Itemised Billing code for ARS The verified code recorded on the SMDR instead of the extension number 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e Verified Code Entry through DISA This feature is also available through the DISA 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA e Verified Code PIN A verified code PIN must be assigned for each verified code through system programming Verified Code Per
182. e The call is routed to the The call is routed to the CLI destination MSN destination operator Intercept Routing No Destination Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the MSN destination but routed to the CLI destination 22 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Example of MSN Table for ISDN BRI Port 1 A table can be programmed for each ISDN BRI port Each BRI port has 10 MSN locations 123 SS e 123 2 get on Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the MSN table Tenant number is used to determine the time mode day lunch break night for the corresponding MSN VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 1 22 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Explanation If the MSN 123 4567 is received from BRI port 1 1 Checks the number in the table Matches the number in location 01 2 Checks the time mode In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mode CLI is disabled Route to MSN destination extension 100 Conditions e To use this feature the MSN service must be assigned for a trunk port as the distribution method BRI DIL DDI MSN Selection 421 e MSN Modification It is possible to modify a received MSN to make it shorter which may be conveni
183. e door in the COS programming Permission for Door Open Access 512 However while engaged on doorphone call any extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in 1 15 1 Doorphone Call Conditions e Hardware Requirement A user supplied door opener on each door e The door opener will unlock the door even if a doorphone is not installed e Door Open Duration The door can remain unlocked for a preprogrammed time period Door Open Duration Time 207 Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 10 1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers lt KX TDA30 gt 6 9 1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers User Manual References User Manual 1 9 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected 144 Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Description A ring tone is sent through the external pager when an incoming call is received Any extension user can answer the call Conditions e Hardware Requirement A user supplied external pager e Floating Extension Number A floating extension number can be assigned for an external pager gt External Pager Floating Extension Number 700 It is possible to access an external pager by dialling their floating extension numbers e Pager Volume It is possible to change the volume of an external pager through system programming Installation Manual References In
184. e hands free operation mode and allows a user to use On hook Dialling The user need not press the SP PHONE button MONITOR button or lift the handset Group Hunting Order for Idle Line Access An idle trunk is selected from the trunk groups assigned for Idle Line Access If multiple trunk groups are available the trunk group hunting sequence can be determined through system programming 82 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features e Trunk Hunting Order for Idle Line Access and Trunk Group Access The trunk hunting sequence in a trunk group from lowest numbered trunk from highest numbered trunk or rotation can be determined through system programming e A company name or customer name can be assigned on a trunk port basis gt LCOT BRI Trunk Name 401 so that the operator or extension user can view the destination which the caller is trying to reach before answering e Itis possible to identify the trunk port that has a trunk connected to it c LCOT BRI Trunk Connection 400 This prevents extension users from originating a call to a trunk which is not connected Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 2 1 Basic Calling Feature Guide 83 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 1 Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY 84 Description An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX extens
185. eated the same as a Caller ID number 1 16 1 Caller ID 5 Call Charge The call charge meter pulses can be received during a Information conversation gt 1 24 2 Charge Meter Conditions e lf an E1 line is used as a trunk the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company e If MFC R2 is selected as the Dial Mode the PBX always sends a dial tone instead of the telephone company when making a trunk call using E1 line 196 Feature Guide 1 21 T1 Line Service Features KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 1 21 T1 Line Service Features KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 1 21 1 T1 Line Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only Description The T1 line carries twenty four 64 kbps voice channels at 1 5 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation PCM 1 Channel Type LCOT GCOT DID TIE OPX The T1 card supports five different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense One of the five channel types can be assigned to one of the 24 channels of the T1 card individually according to tariffs and customer needs 2 T1 Features The following table shows the features available for each channel type Feature Table LCOT GCOT TIE E amp M Available Explanation HEEN Description the Table P 1 TIE Line Refer to the TIE Line Service feature 1 27 1 TIE Line Service Service 2 Direct Inward Refer to the DID feature
186. eature 1 2 2 6 Log in Log out Because to use the VIP Call feature and or Wrap up feature Call Waiting mode on each extension should be off Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 3 Queuing Feature Description When a preprogrammed number of extensions Maximum Number of Agents 632 in an incoming call distribution group are busy additional incoming calls can wait in a queue The number of calls which can be in the waiting queue is programmable Queuing Call Capacity 628 While calls are waiting in the queue the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table Queuing Time Table 630 which can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service Each Queuing Time Table has a specified number of sequences The following procedures are provided to make up a Queuing Time Table Procedure Table An outgoing message OGM a After the outgoing message OGM 01 64 with the KX TDA100 KX Music on Hold will be sent and redirects TDA200 or 01 32 with the KX to the next sequence TDAS3O is sent to the caller Puts the caller in the waiting If an outgoing message OGM has not queue for b 01 16 x 5 seconds been sent to the caller the caller hears a ringback tone If an outgoing message OGM has been sent to the caller the caller hears Music on Hold None Redirects to the next sequence lf assigned on sequence 01 the No command Queuing Time Table wi
187. ection 1 1 3 2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Preferred Line Assignment Incoming 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Hot Line Setting 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park Display Language 1 18 4 Display Information ISDN Bearer Mode 1 19 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Flexible Button Assignment 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons Note To change the setting of the extension data above the setting for the wired telephone or the PS must be changed individually When changing the PS setting use the PS s original extension number not the main telephone s extension number if required e When the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode has been set the following extension data for the wired telephone is copied to the PBX extension data for the PS and the extension data remains there even when the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is cancelled Call Waiting Setting 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting FWD DND Setting 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Call Pickup Deny Setting 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Executive Busy Override Deny Setting Itemised Billing Code for ARS 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park CLIP COLP Number CLIP COLP Number 606 CLI
188. ection User Manual References User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 97 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Description An extension user can talk with a busy extension through the built in soeaker and microphone of the called party s PT If the existing call is using a handset a second conversation is made using the speakerphone and microphone so that the called extension can talk to both parties Conditions 98 COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature This feature is available when the called extension uses one of the following telephones KX T7625 KX T7630 KX T7633 KX T7636 KX T7536 KX T7436 KX T7235 except KX T7235G FR SL NE If the KX T7235G FR SL NE are connected to the PBX the OHCA feature for the KX T7235 should be disabled through system programming The OHCA feature cannot be used in the following cases a COS or called extension s telephone type is not available for this feature b The called extension DPT is connected to a PC PC Console or PC Phone via the USB Module c The called extension DPT is in the Digital XDP connection KX TDA30 only The Call Waiting tone is sent to the called extension 1 7 4 2 Call Waiting Tone While an extension is receiving OHCA if the extension user places the current trunk call on hold or transfers the current intercom call or trunk call OH
189. ed Feature Guide 175 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features User Manual References User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 176 Feature Guide 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 1 19 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Description ISDN is a digital switching and transmission network ISDN transmits voice data and image in digital format ISDN lines if available can be connected to public line trunk private line QSIG or ISDN terminal devices extension 1 ISDN Interface and Configuration Point to Point Basic Rate Provides two 64 kbps B channels Trunk Interface BRI for communication and one 16 Extension Point to kbps D channel for signalling 2B multipoint GES QSIG Master Point to Point Slave Provides thirty or twenty three 64 Trunk QSIG Point to Point kbps B channels for Master Slave communication and one 64 kbps Extension D channel for signalling 30B Di Primary Rate Interface PRI 23B D BRI Configuration 426 For BRI only Note Point to Point P P One ISDN terminal device can be connected to one ISDN port Point to multipoint P MP A maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to one ISDN port Feature Guide 177 1 19 Integrated Services
190. ed settings The dialled number will be checked and modified to connect the appropriate carrier Carrier Selection Procedure Flowchart The numbers 0 in the flowchart correspond to the Programming Procedures on the following pages A trunk call is made Is the ARS mode 1 enabled No Normal Trunk Access Sends the telephone number to the user selected carrier Is the dialled number found in the Leading Number Exception Table 2 Is the dialled number found in the Leading Number Table 3 Checks the Routing Plan Table to determine which carrier to use Is the carrier 6 found in the appropriate time block 5 Is there an available trunk group Q Because all trunks are busy Yes Modifies the dialled number by removing the digits 9 and following the modify commands 2 Yes default Is normal Trunk Access allowed Sends the telephone number by the Idle Line Access Sends reorder tone Sends busy tone Sends the modified number to the trunk Feature Guide 111 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 112 Programm 1 3 Feature Guide ing Procedures ARS Mode Assignment ARS Mode 320 It is possible to select whether ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method or when a
191. eferences The operation required to implement the feature described in the User Manual is noted for your reference Abbreviations There are many abbreviations used in this manual e g PT which stands for proprietary telephone Please refer to the list in this manual 4 3 List of Abbreviations for the meaning of each abbreviation About the other manuals Along with this Feature Guide the following manuals are available to help you install and use this PBX Feature Guide Installation Manual Provides instructions for installing the hardware and maintenance of the PBX User Manual Provides operating instructions for end users using PTs SLTs PSs or DSS Consoles C The KX TDASOE the KX TDAS3ONE the KX TDA30GR and the KX TDA30CE are designed to interwork with the e Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of a European country e Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access The KX TDA100E KX TDA200E the KX TDA100NE KX TDA200NE the KX TDA100GR KX TDA200GR and the KX TDA100CE KX TDA200CE are designed to interwork with the Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of a European country e Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access e Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN primary rate access e ONP 2048 kbit s digital structured leased lines D2048S We Panasonic Communications
192. em R2 E amp M C Continuous E amp MYE amp M P Pulsed E amp M The E1 card supports three different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense One of the three channel types can be assigned to one of the 30 channels of the E1 card individually according to tariffs and customer needs E1 Features The following table shows the features available for each channel type Feature Table 5 Call Charge Channel Type 1 TIE 2 DID 3 DIL 4 ANI Information pa Bue 4 gt came tw e Pe e v Available t Receiving Dial Mode should be MFC R2 Available when this PBX is connected to the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or KX TD500 Feature Guide 195 1 20 E1 Line Service Features KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only Explanation EECH Description the table P TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature 1 27 1 TIE Line Service Direct Inward Refer to the DID feature 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling Dialling DID DID Direct Dialling In ch Direct In Line Refer to the DIL feature gt 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL DIL Automatic Outgoing ANI Number Sends the callers number to the E1 line The sending Identification method is the same as ISDN CLIP service 1 19 1 2 ANI Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Incoming ANI Receives the caller s number from the E1 line When the ANI number is received it can be tr
193. ent when programming the MSN table Modification method removed number of digits added number can be programmed on a trunk port basis Modification Example Removed number of digits 6 Modified MSN 876543 21 1021 Added number 10 N Received MSN 87654321 1 Remove the first 2 Add 10 6 digits e When using point to multipoint configuration with a BRI do not connect another ISDN terminal device in parallel with the PBX As only two channels can be used at one time with the BRI the other ISDN terminal device may monopolise both channels Feature Guide References 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Feature Guide 23 1 1 Incoming Call Features 2 2 4 Time Service 24 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Description Directs an incoming trunk call to a destination when the caller s identification number e g Caller ID matches the number in the System Speed Dialling Table which is used as the Caller ID Table Each Caller ID number telephone number for each System Speed Dialling number can have its own destination Caller ID Caller s number is sent from an analogue 1 16 1 Caller trunk ID Calling Line Identification Callers number is sent from an ISDN line 1 19 1 2 Presentation CLIP Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Automatic Number Callers number is sent from an E
194. epending on the trunk card type which a call arrives through a LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT Card The incoming trunk call will ring at the original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone b Other Trunk Cards Busy tone will be sent to the caller e If the intercept destination cannot receive the call a Intercept Routing No Answer Intercept timer will restart at the original destination until the call is answered b Intercept Routing Busy DND The call will be sent back to the original destination when the call arrives through the LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card When the call arrives through other trunk cards the caller will hear busy tone e Idle Extension Hunting If an extension is a member of an idle extension hunting group calls to that extension will not be redirected by Intercept Routing Busy DND If the extension is busy or in DND mode calls to that extension will be redirected to the next extension in the idle extension hunting group Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Feature Guide References 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Feature Guide 29 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination Description Provides automatic redirection of an incoming trunk call which does not have a destination assigned The intercept destination is an operator tenant PBX Operator Assignment 006 For PBX operator only Conditions e Intercept Routing
195. ephone This feature is available only when the KX T7710 is in the PBX mode e his feature is available while hearing a dial tone e Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX T7710 for additional information Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 2 2 Easy Dialling Feature Guide 87 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Description Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialled to allow the same number to be dialled again Automatic Redial If Last Number Redial is performed in hands free mode and the called party is busy redialling will be automatically retried a preprogrammed number of times Automatic Redial Repeat Times 205 at preprogrammed intervals Automatic Redial Interval 206 The Redial Call No answer Ring Duration time is programmable This feature is available only on certain PT models which have the SP PHONE button Outgoing Call Log The last five dialled numbers are automatically stored at each extension A display PT user can redial easily any of the stored numbers Conditions 88 The memorised telephone number is replaced by a new one If any dialling operation is done or an incoming call is answered during Automatic Redial Automatic Redial is cancelled Automatic Redial is not available for some countries areas when using an analogue trunk Interrupt Redial When the called part
196. ept destination TEN A is sent to the caller DISA Intercept Routing The call is routed to The call is established No Answer the intercept destination Intercept Routing Busy DND F Busy Tone Time Time out Goes to Does the destination answer the call DISA Disconnect Time after Intercept Time out The call is established The call is disconnected Feature numbers are available only when the Walking COS feature is used for Security Mode Override Goes to E Yes Feature Guide 153 1 15 Optional Device Features 154 Conditions WARNING When you enable the Trunk to Trunk Call feature of DISA and a third party discovers the personal identification number PIN verified code PIN extension PIN of the PBX there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line and the cost will be charged to your own account In order to avoid this problem we strongly recommend the following points Feature Guide a Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN b Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it c Change the PIN frequently Hardware Requirement KX TDA100 KX TDA200 The OPB card and MSG card KX TDA30 The MSG card DISA Delayed Answer Time It is possible to set the Delayed Answer time DISA Delayed Answer Time 209 so that the caller will hear a ringback tone within a preprogrammed time period first befo
197. ept the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 7 Allows intercom calls only Programming Example Level for Time Mode Level for System t gt TRS Barring Level 501 2 gt TRS Barring Level for System Speed Dialling 509 Feature Guide 101 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features Flowchart An extension user makes a trunk call Is the call made by System Yes Speed Dialling No Is TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling enabled Yes Checks the Checks the TRS Barring TRS Barring level for level for System Speed the time mode of the Dialling of the extension s COS extension s COS Level 7 l l Level 1 What is the TRS Barring level Levels 2 3 4 5 6 Is the dialled number found in No applicable Denied Code Tables Yes Yes Is the dialled number found in applicable Exception Code Tables No The call is denied The call is made The user hears reorder tone 102 Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features Conditions WARNING The software contained in the TRS Barring feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are p
198. er in a One touch Dialling button Conditions e One touch Dialling Button A flexible button can be customised as a One touch Dialling button e Full One touch Dialling There is no need to go off hook before pressing the One touch Dialling button Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 86 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features KX T7710 One touch Dialling KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only Description The Message button and One touch buttons on all KX T7710 telephones connected to the PBX can be customised at once through system programming The same extension number telephone number or feature number will be assigned to the same buttons on each KX T7710 useful for hotel room extensions or similar applications Programming Example Message 702 Message Waiting To Call Back One touch Dial 01 100 Front Desk One touch Dial 02 x7601 Wake up Call One touch Dial 03 102 Restaurant The Message button is programmed by default to call back a caller who left a message waiting indication however the Message button can be programmed to perform other features The eight One touch buttons have no default setting Conditions e One touch Dialling numbers for the KX T7710 follow the flexible numbering plan 2 3 5 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering e The KX T7710 has two modes NORMAL mode and PBX mode selected by a switch on the tel
199. er PBX or Goes to A Trunk Group A is in the flowchart of Access No Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension Extension No Extension No Does the corresponding extension exist No Is the corresponding extension idle Calls the extension e Call Waiting Busy tone Intercept Routing Busy DND Sends reorder tone or sends the call to the operator Intercept Routing No Destination Is the trunk group of the outgoing call from the own PBX enabled against the COS of the trunk group of the incoming call to the own PBX No Reorder tone TRS Barring applies Y Sends the call to the trunk Feature Guide 259 1 27 Networking Features Conditions e When a TIE line call arrives at a busy extension which has disabled Call Waiting the caller will hear busy tone If required Intercept Routing Busy DND can be activated e The Inter digit time can be assigned for TIE line calls Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 1 11 1 Call Transfer 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 3 5 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering User Manual References User Manual 1 2 1 Basic Calling 260 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features 1 27 2 Virtual Private Network VPN
200. er matches a telephone number the Trunk Access number is disregarded in the table the call is sent to the assigned CLI destination Feature Guide 1 16 Caller ID Features Example Location e System Speed Telephone No system Spero Meling PE Dialling No Name 2 Destination 90123456789 ABC Company we ww 03 pf t System Speed Dialling Number 001 2 System Speed Dialling Name 002 3 3 Caller s Name Reference A name can also be shown on the display or SMDR The PBX searches for the name in the following order 1 Personal Speed Dialling data of the original called extension 2 System Speed Dialling Caller ID Table 3 Caller ID name received from the public line Caller ID Name Reference If the name is not found it will not be displayed Conditions General Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming Caller ID Signal Type 490 The Caller ID Name Reference is only available for calls from the public network For Users in New Zealand only Using the toll services of a company other than Telecom NZ If the PBX is set up to use the toll services of a company other than Telecom NZ the telephone numbers dialled from the Caller Display listings within the PBX will be directed through the toll services of the other company because the telephone numbers include the toll access digit and area code digit A toll charge may be incurred Please chec
201. er to the Operating Instructions for the headset This feature is also known as Handset Headset Selection Conditions A headset is an option If the headset mode is on pressing the SP PHONE button activates the headset not the built in speaker To set the headset mode on a DPT use personal programming Headset Operation or press the Headset button To set headset mode on an APT use the handset headset selector provided on the set and or on the headset Headset Button A flexible button on a DPT can be customised as the Headset button The Headset button can be also assigned to a flexible button on an APT but the button does not work Answer Release Button A flexible button can be customised as an Answer button or a Release button Such buttons are useful for headset operation It is possible to answer an incoming call by pressing an Answer button While hearing the Call Waiting tone during a conversation pressing an Answer button enables one to answer the second call by placing the current call on hold Pressing a Release button enables one to disconnect the line during or after conversation or to complete a Call Transfer It is possible to switch the headset mode to the hands free mode or vice versa during a conversation by pressing the Headset button Headset users cannot use the following features Automatic Redial gt 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Receiving OHCA 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA
202. es during a preprogrammed time period or during clearing the prerecorded message stored at the floating extension number of desired message The longer one is applied Record a message when traffic is light early morning or late evening When the manager tries to record a message he will hear ringback tone if a message channel is in use When all ports of the MSG card s become idle he will hear the progress tone for a preprogrammed time period After that the PBX will automatically proceed into the recording mode Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 6 1 OPB3 Card 2 6 5 MSG4 Card lt KX TDA30 gt 6 5 4 MSG2 Card User Manual References User Manual Feature Guide 2 1 5 Recording Outgoing Messages OGM 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Description An outside caller can access specific PBX features as if the caller is an SLT extension user on the PBX when the incoming call destination is a DISA floating extension number assigned to each DISA message The caller can have direct access to features such as e Placing an intercom call to an extension operator or any floating extensions eg modem for remote system administration an external pager for TAFAS e Calling an outside party via the PBX e Operating some PBX remote features e g FWD Outgoing Message OGM When a call arrives on a DISA line a prerecorded DISA message
203. f through system programming e Whether the SLT rings for incoming calls is programmable Ring on Both telephones ring except when the PT is in Hands free Answerback mode gt 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback or voice calling mode Alternate Receiving Ring Voice gt 1 5 3 Intercom Call Ring off Only the PT rings However the SLT can answer the call e If one goes off hook while the other is on a call the call is switched to the former However the call will not be switched in one of the following conditions a While being monitored by another extension gt 1 5 3 Intercom Call b While receiving OHCA 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA or Whisper OHCA 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA C During a Conference call 1 13 1 Conference Features d While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 22 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Feature Guide 125 1 10 Conversation Features 126 DPT DPT Available Telephones KX T7600 series except KX T7640 The PBX supports a maximum of 24 DPTs including master and slave DPTs When using Digital XDP connection the following features cannot be used with the DPTs a OHCA A call waiting tone will be heard even if the OHCA feature is set b USB Module The DPTs will not work correctly if a USB Module is connected Do not connect USB Modules to the DPTs Note Even if the slave DPT is disconnected the OHCA feature
204. features 1 Call Forwarding FWD 2 Do Not Disturb DND FWD Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD DND An extension user can send the tone to let the caller know he is not available 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND Conditions Feature Guide FWD and DND features apply to Intercom calls including doorphone calls and trunk calls including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold FWD DND Button Both the FWD and DND features for the extension can be customised on a flexible button Only one of the features will work at a time Multiple types of FWD DND buttons can be customised on an extension Group FWD Button The FWD feature for the incoming call distribution group can be customised on a flexible button Multiple types of Group FWD buttons can be customised on an extension FWD DND Button and Group FWD Button Types FWD DND for FWD DND Internal Works for incoming intercom calls extension FWD DND External Works for incoming trunk calls FWD DND Both Works for all incoming calls 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features FWD for Group FWD Internal Works for incoming intercom calls Incoming Call Distribution Group FWD External Works for incoming trunk calls Group Group FWD Both Works for all incoming calls Button Status FWD DND Butto
205. ference Call the Unattended Conference Recall time is applied 1 13 1 2 Conference Feature Guide 123 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone 124 Description Multiple telephones can be connected to the same port This is useful to increase the number of telephones without additional extension cards The combinations and features of the parallelled telephones are described below Features Descriptions Connections Parallel Mode EXtra Device Port XDP Mode Digital XDP KX TDA30 only Feature Guide Parallel connection allows the connection of an SLT to an APT or a DPT that is connected to a super hybrid port When parallel mode is enabled the two telephones function as follows Both share one extension number main Telephone e extension number Either teleohone can make or answer a call If one goes off hook while the other is on a call the call is switched to the former XDP mode can be used when the main telephone in a parallel connection is a DPT connected to a super hybrid port Unlike parallel mode each telephone can act as a completely different extension with its own extension number 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration The Digital XDP allows the connection of a DPT to a DPT that is connected to a DPT or super hybrid port The DPT that is connected directly to the PBX is called the master DPT and the DPT connected to the master is the slave DPT
206. ferences such as gt Date amp Time 000 indicate that system programming can be done by PT programming Feature Guide 3 A For further details please refer to the on line help of the Maintenance Console 3 2 1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console Feature Highlights Networking Features This PBX supports the following networking features TIE Line Service A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations 1 27 1 TIE Line Service Virtual Private Network VPN VPN is a service provided by the telephone company It uses an existing line as if it were a private line 1 27 2 Virtual Private Network VPN QSIG Network QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN Q 931 and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network 1 27 3 QSIG Network Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network The PBX can connect to another PBX via an IP type private network In this case voice signals are converted into IP packets and sent through this network 1 27 4 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Built in Small Call Centre Features An incoming call distribution group 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features can be used as a small call centre with the following features Queuing Feature When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution g
207. following cases Room service calls in a hotel Calling another branch via the public network The extension user needs to dial only the extension number of another branch e Quick Dialling numbers follow the flexible numbering plan gt 2 3 5 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering e The storing example is as follows Location No Quick Dialling No Desired Number Quick Dialling 01 9110 Trunk Call Quick Dialling 02 3016 Room Service Quick Dialling 03 2011 90123456789 Another Branch User Manual References User Manual 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 90 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Description An extension user can make an outgoing call by only going off hook if the user has previously stored the telephone number or the extension number If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off hook a dial tone is generated for a specified Waiting time assigned through system programming Hot Line Waiting Time 204 and then dialling starts During the Waiting time the user can dial another party overriding the Hot Line feature This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling Conditions e Capable Telephone PT SLT T1 OPX and PS User Manual References User Manual 1 2 2 Easy Dialling Feature Guide 91 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on Description If the line is busy when a c
208. from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extensions Supervisory Incoming The supervisor extension can monitor Feature Call Queue various information about the incoming Supervisory Monitor calls for each incoming call distribution group on his display Log in Log Monitor The supervisor extension can out Monitor monitor the log in log out status of the and Remote group members Control Remote Control The supervisor extension can change the status of the members Conditions e One extension can belong to multiple incoming call distribution groups e ICD Group button An Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group button can be assigned on a flexible button for each incoming call distribution group It receives the incoming calls to the group One extension can have more than one ICD Group button of the same or different incoming call distribution groups Multiple ICD Group If all ICD Group buttons in the same incoming call distribution group are occupied the next incoming call will be held in a queue or will overflow If the ICD Group button is not assigned incoming calls will arrive at the INTERCOM or CO button Even though an extension can have an ICD Group button for an incoming call distribution group that the extension has not been programmed to be included through system programming Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 620 the ICD Group button will not receive calls to that group e Group
209. g Plan No No No of Digits Table No 4 ARS Routing Plan Table Routing Plan Table 1 OTT Priority 1 Priority 2 SUN Time B 12 00 EE 15 00 Time D 21 00 rt Time A 0001 08 8 J OASE EG g A telecom B telecom C telecom A telecom A telecom 4 D telecom telecom B telecom SAT B telecom A telecom telecom B telecom C telecom C telecom C telecom C telecom sesch ee oo oL NINIA Le sar Le ML II Je 00 Time B 12 Time C 15 00 Time D 21 00 3 lt x gt gt NO i i me B ime C me D me A me B me C me D Ti T Ti Ti Ti Ti Ti gt gt gt Feature Guide 113 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features I ARS Routing Plan Time Table 330 7 gt ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 331 346 5 Carrier Table Assignment A specified number of carriers can be programmed Assign the following items for each Carrier Table Carrier Name Assign the carrier name Removed Number of Digits Assign the number of digits to remove from the beginning of the user dialled number Carrier Access Code 0 Assign the code to access the carrier Trunk Group Assign the trunk groups which connect to each carrier Modify Command 2 Assign the commands to modify the dialled number to access the carrier Command Explanation Command Description Number
210. g Time 05 10 The longest queuing time EXIT LOG SPRVS Since 29 JAN 09 10AM Monitoring starting date and time Total Calls 00996 Total number of incoming calls Overflow Calls 00131 Total number of overflowed calls Lost Calls 00039 The number of lost calls Average Waiting 02 12 Average queuing time EXIT CLEAR lt Log in Log out Monitor Remote Control Mode with DSS Button light gt 31 Jan 08 13AM FRI 250 Sales Section Waiting Calls Now 00006 as dg ma c c Max Waiting Time 05 10 nm G G G co ur d DD dq d EXIT d Log in Log out Monitor Log in Log out Remote Control DSS buttons of the incoming call y Pressing the button changes distribution group members show the status as follows their status Light pattern Status Status Light pattern Login Ready Slow Green Flashing Log in Not Ready Log in Ready Green on Off Extension in another incoming call distribution group 54 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Conditions Available Extension as a Supervisor Extension a One supervisor extension can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group but it need not belong to the group b One extension can be the supervisor extension of more than one incoming call distribution group Available Paired DSS Console The KX T7640 KX T7440 and KX T7441 are available for this feature
211. ging volume from the PTs and the external pagers can be changed through system programming e Paging DND When DND 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND is set for incoming calls it is programmable whether your extension receives paging through system programming User Manual References User Manual 1 6 1 Paging 1 6 2 Answering Denying a Paging Announcement Feature Guide 141 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 1 Doorphone Call 142 Description A visitor using a doorphone will call a preprogrammed destination extension or outside party Exte nsion users can call a doorphone Conditions Hardware Requirement KX TDA100 KX TDA200 An optional Doorphone the OPB card and DPH card KX TDA30 An optional Doorphone and the DPH card Each doorphone port must be assigned to one tenant The Time Table day lunch break night of the tenant applies gt 2 2 4 Time Service Call Destination The incoming doorphone call destination s can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night for each doorphone port gt Doorphone Call Destination 720 Destinations can be selected 1 1 2 1 Internal Call Features SUMMARY COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make an outgoing trunk call Internal Call Block determines which extensions can call a doorphone 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block Ring Duration If an incoming call is not answered within a
212. grammer Code Change from the Tool menu Passwords can be changed through system programming If the wrong password is entered a preprogrammed number of times Default None no limitation remotely access will be locked and can only be unlocked by enabling remote access through system programming Remote Programming 810 Feature Guide 293 2 3 System Data Control 294 POSE Password Description Code Installer Level System Password All system programming is accessible Programmer for Installer Code Administrator System Password Permitted system programming is Level for Administrator accessible Each system programming can Programmer for PC Programming be determined whether to be accessed by Code the administrator User Level System Password Permitted system programming is Programmer for User for PC accessible Each system programming can Code Programming be determined whether to be accessed by the end users e Remote Programming Limitation It is possible to disable remote access through system programming Remote Programming 810 e f an extension user sets the Walking Extension feature while the extension data e g Headset mode is programmed through PC programming some extension data for the user may not be transferred properly Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 3 1 MPR Card 2 3 2 RMT Card 2 6 6 CTI LINK Card 3 1 Overview KX TDA100
213. he DID DDI number is 123 4567 1 Checks the number in the table Matches the number in location 0001 2 Checks the time mode In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mode CLI is disabled Route to DID DDI destination extension 100 Conditions e To use this feature the DID DDI service must be assigned for a trunk port as the distribution method BRI DIL DDI MSN Selection 421 For BRI only e DID DDI Number Modification It is possible to modify a received DID DDI number which may be convenient when programming the DID DDI table Modification method removed number of digits added number can be programmed on a trunk port basis Modification Example Removed number of digits 6 Modified DID DDI number 876543 21 1021 Added number 10 Received DID DDI number 87654321 1 Remove the 2 Add 10 first 6 digits 20 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features e The Inter digit Time When the Inter digit time expires the PBX stops receiving DID DDI number and starts to check the DID DDI table Refer to the Programming Example of DID DDI Table above Even if the Inter digit time does not expire the PBX stops receiving the DID DDI number when the received number is found in the DID DDI table The PBX then routes the call to the corresponding destination If the received number matches several DID DDI numbers in the table the DID DDI number of the lowest numbered location has priori
214. he VPS answers the call Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number Feature Guide 205 1 22 Voice Mail Features Performance of Pressing the VM Transfer Button and Entering an Extension Number Transmitted Command In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Switching to VM command Recording message command Recording message command H Mailbox No 6 H H Mailbox No Example Trunk Call Sent 6 103 LU mailbox number Switching to VM command Transfer with VM Transfer button extension number 103 Extension VPS In AA service mode Operator VM Port 2 VM DTMF Group Y VM Port 3 d Listening to a Recorded Message If the VPS receives a message the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature e g turning on the Message button light on the corresponding telephone as notification 1 17 1 Message Waiting Thereby the VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox When the Message button light turns on pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox number It is programmable whether the PBX or the VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature e g turning off the Message button light When the PBX is selected the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has accessed the VPS When the VPS is selected th
215. he call log for the answering extension Call Log for PS Calls If a PS or a CS is in one of the following situations when a call arrives the information is logged in the call log for the PS a When the PS is out of range b When the PS is turned off c When the CS is busy Incoming Call Log Display Lock An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log display to prevent other users from referring to the call information at his extension through personal programming Directory and Call Log Lock In this case the Outgoing Call Log display and the Personal Speed Feature Guide 161 1 16 Caller ID Features Dialling number display is also locked An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature gt 1 25 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN e Storing the Call Log Information in Personal Speed Dialling When storing the number and name into Personal Speed Dialling from the call log information the Idle Line Access number is automatically attached to the telephone number e Incoming Call Log Memory The total memory for the Incoming Call Log is determined in the PBX The maximum number that can be logged for each extension and incoming call distribution group is also determined through system programming If the memory becomes full the new call record overwrites the oldest one Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Ma
216. he conference 2nd Unattended Conference Recall Continuation time will start c 2nd Unattended Conference Recall Continuation Time When the timer expires the Unattended Conference call is disconnected If the originator returns to the conference before the Unattended Conference call is disconnected the timer will be cancelled If not Unattended Conference Recall and an alarm tone will continue to be emitted until the Unattended Conference call is disconnected For Six or More Party Conference The ECHO card is required Also the Echocanceller should be enabled through system programming Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 6 4 ECHO16 Card lt KX TDA30 gt 6 5 3 ECHO8 Card Feature Guide References 1 18 Feature Guide 2 Flexible Buttons 1 13 Conference Features User Manual References User Manual 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Feature Guide 137 1 13 Conference Features 1 13 1 3 Privacy Release Description By default all conversations which take place on trunk extension lines and doorphone lines are protected by privacy Automatic Privacy Privacy Release allows a PT user to suspend Automatic Privacy for an existing trunk call on the S CO button in order to establish a three party call System programming is required to enable or disable this feature Conditions e S CO Button A flexible button can be customised as the S CO button e Pri
217. hone company Terminate Mode Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone determined by the Line Preference Outgoing setting gt 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Conditions FLASH RECALL Button Mode One of the following modes can be selected for each extension through system programming Flash Recall mode Terminate mode External Feature Access EFA mode 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA Terminate Button A flexible button can be customised as the Terminate button Disconnect Time Only for Flash Recall Mode The amount of time between successive accesses to the same trunk is programmable for each trunk port LCOT Disconnect Time 418 This feature outputs an SMDR call record 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR restarts the call timer inserts the automatic pause and checks the TRS Barring level 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring again If the ARS mode is on 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS or if a trunk call is established through the INTERCOM button or ICD Group button the Terminate mode will be always effective even though the Flash Recall mode has been set Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons Feature Guide 121 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA 122 Description An extension user can have access to the features of a host PBX or the telephone company such as Tran
218. ht patterns of the FWD DND Both button including FWD DND button fixed button and the Group FWD Both button will indicate the setting for either trunk calls Feature Guide 57 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features or intercom calls but not both Note The FWD and DND icons on a PS display reflect the settings for trunk calls only b pressing the FWD DND Both button including FWD DND button fixed button or the Group FWD Both button will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom calls and trunk calls separately Feature Guide References 1 18 1 Fixed Buttons 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 58 Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Description Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their calls to preset destinations The circumstances under which the calls are forwarded are as follows All Calls Any time Follow Me When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving the desk this feature can be set from the destination extension When the extension user s line is busy When the extension user does not answer within a preprogrammed time Call Forwarding No Answer Time 605 Busy No Answer When the extension user s line is busy or the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time Call Forwarding No
219. ice A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice through personal programming Alternate Receiving Ring Voice If a user selects voice calling the calling party talks to the user immediately after a confirmation tone Denying voice calling can also be selected Alternate Calling Ring Voice A caller can change the called party s preset call receiving method ring tone or voice By doing so ring calling is switched to voice calling or vice versa at the called party The called party may deny voice calling Tone after Dialling After dialling an extension number a user will hear one of the following Ringback Tone Indicates the called party is being called Confirmation Tone Indicates the called party has set voice calling Busy Tone Indicates the called party is busy DND Tone Indicates the called party has set DND Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 2 1 Basic Calling 1 2 6 Alternating the Calling Method Alternate Calling Ring Voice 1 11 2 Using the Directories 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 Trunk Call Features 1 5 4 1 Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Description An extension user can use the following features when making a trunk call eus eene Soen Emergency Call Account Code Entry Pulse to Tone Conversion Pause Insertion A user can dial
220. ification number PIN verified code PIN extension PIN of the PBX there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line and the cost will be charged to your own account In order to avoi Feature Guide d this problem we strongly recommend the following points a Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN b Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it c Change the PIN frequently Extension PIN Lock If the wrong PIN is entered incorrectly three times the line will be disconnected If the incorrect PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively the PIN against the extension will be locked Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the PIN will be unlocked and cleared This feature is also known as Station Password Lock Remote Extension PIN Clear If an extension user forgets his PIN a manager can clear the PIN Then the extension user can assign a new PIN Extension PIN Display It is possible to select whether to show the extension PIN on the display through system programming By default it is shown as dots 1 25 Extension Controlling Features User Manual References User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 235 1 25 Extension Controlling Features 1 25 2 Extension Feature Clear 236 Description Extension users can clear all the following features set o
221. ime limit at five second intervals If the timer expires the line will be disconnected COS programming determines to enable or disable this feature Trunk Call Duration Limitation 502 Whether this feature is applied to outgoing calls only or all calls is also programmable Trunk to Trunk Call If a call between two outside parties is established the call except Unattended duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each Conference Call trunk group Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 473 Both parties Duration will hear an alarm tone 15 seconds before the time limit at five second intervals If the timer expires the line will be disconnected The timer is applied for a trunk call which is made via the PBX If both call is made by the extension e g a trunk call made by an extension is transferred to an outside party the shorter limit will apply to the call Budget Management When the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached an extension user will start to hear an alarm tone three times at five second intervals and the user cannot make further trunk calls Whether the line is disconnected after the alarm tone is programmable 1 8 2 Budget Management Dialling Digit Restriction While engaged on a received trunk call the dialling of digits can during Conversation be restricted If the number of dialled digits exceeds the limitation the line will be disconnected Conditions e During an Unattended Con
222. ing If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block the FWD feature to the extension does NOT work Conditions General e FWD for Trunk Calls Intercom Calls The FWD feature can be set for trunk calls for intercom calls or for both of them by the extension user e FWD from Incoming Call Distribution Group Group FWD COS programming determines the incoming call distribution groups that can use this feature e FWD to Trunk COS programming determines the extensions or incoming call distribution groups that can forward calls externally Call Forwarding to Trunk 504 The original extension s TRS Barring and ARS still apply to the forwarded call 60 Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Trunk Call Duration If a call between an extension user and an outside party or between two outside parties is established the call duration can be restricted by a system timer Extension to Trunk Call Duration 472 and Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 473 If the timer expires the line will be disconnected 1 10 8 Trunk Call Limitation Multiple FWD Calls can be forwarded up to four times The following forwarding features are counted as Multiple FWD FWD Busy or Busy No Answer in case a destination extension is busy or All Calls Idle Extension Hunting Overflow Intercept Routing Busy DND in case a destina
223. ing Programming x30 Doorphone Call x31 Group Paging x33 External BGM on off x35 e Message OGM playback record x36 clear S CO Line Access x37 37 Parallel Telephone Mode set cancel x39 Group Call Pickup x40 Directed Call Pickup x41 TAFAS Calls through an External Pager x42 Group Paging answer x43 Automatic Callback Busy cancel CCBS cancel x46 User Remote Operation Walking COS Verified x47 47 Code Entry Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set cancel x48 Account Code Entry x49 Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve x50 Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a Holding X51 Extension Number Call Park Call Park Retrieve x52 Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a Held Trunk x53 Number Door Open x55 Feature Guide 301 2 3 System Data Control External Feature Access ISDN Hold COLR set cancel CLIR set cancel Switch CLIP COLP of the Trunk Extension MCID ISDN FWD set cancel confirm Message Waiting set cancel callback FWD DND set cancel Both FWD DND set cancel External FWD DND set cancel Internal FWD DND No Answer Timer set Group FWD set cancel Both Group FWD set cancel External Group FWD set cancel Internal Call Pickup Deny set cancel Paging Deny set cancel Walking Extension Data Line Security set cancel Call Waiting for Intercom Calls set cancel Call Waiting for Trunk Calls including doorphone calls calls for an incoming call distribution group set cancel Executive Busy Override Deny set cancel No
224. ing Call 624 gt Q p re gt gt gt LB Ring UCD END ENTER Group No Priority Hunt ENTER 01 64 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 625 625 gt gt gt penge b gt Destination No rr Distribution ENTERS EE ay 2 Lunc ENTER Group No 3 Break 4 Night Overflow Time 626 Incoming Call 626 gt Q Distribution gt Overflow Time gt amp gt 7 END ENTER Group No ES ENTER 01 64 Destination When All Busy 627 627 gt e gt Tong wot gt Time No gt Destination No gt gt Distribution 1 Day 2 Lunch Max 32 digits ENTER Group No 3 Break 4 Night 01 64 gt gt 6 gt a END ENTER Feature Guide 351 3 3 PT Programming Queuing Call Capacity 628 Incoming Call 628 gt Gr Distribution Number in Queuing gt D ENTER Group No ae ENTER SR 01 64 Queuing Hurry up Level 629 Incoming Call 629 gt gt d a ENTER Group No None 1 30 ENTER 01 64 Queuing Time Table 630 Incoming Call 630 gt gt Distribution gt gt Table No gt gt 1 Day 2 Lunch None 01 64 ENTER Group No 3 Break 4 Night gt gt L it END ENTER Sequences in Queuing Time Table 631 631 gt n Table No gt gt gt gt gt 01 64 01 16 None Overflow ENTER Disconnect N x 5 s Sequence N OGM N gt gt gt Number must be entered in
225. ing the hookswitch Hold Feature No Hold Feature No Hold Feature No Going on hook Trunk Access No Extension No If the following occurs frequently with an SLT choose Mode 2 Mode 3 or Mode 4 a When an SLT user receives a call reorder tone is heard or nobody answers the call b When an SLT user goes off hook reorder tone is heard instead of a dial tone If a call is not terminated after going on hook the above cases occur To avoid these problems choose Mode 2 Mode 3 or Mode 4 Every call will be terminated unless the Hold feature number is entered after flashing the hookswitch in Mode 2 Mode 3 and Mode 4 e Hold Alarm tone pattern has a default 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones User Manual References User Manual 1 4 2 Holding a Call Feature Guide 131 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 2 Call Park Description An extension user can place a call into a common parking zone of the PBX The Call Park feature can be used as a transferring feature this releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations The parked call can be retrieved by any extension user Conditions Automatic Call Park It is possible to select an idle parking zone automatically Retry If the specified parking zone is occupied or there is no vacant zone for Automatic Call Park the originator will hear busy tone Retrying is possible while hearing busy tone by selecting parking zone or a vacant zone Ca
226. iode MCID Malicious Call Identification MSN Multiple Subscriber Number O OGM Outgoing Message OHCA Off hook Call Announcement OPX Off Premise Extension P P MP Point to multipoint P P Point to Point PIN Personal Identification Number PRI Primary Rate Interface PS Portable Station PT Proprietary Telephone S S CO Single CO SLT Single Line Telephone SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Feature Guide 369 4 3 List of Abbreviations T TAFAS Trunk Answer from Any Station TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier TRG Trunk Group TRS Barring Toll Restriction Call Barring U UCD Uniform Call Distribution V VM Voice Mail VolP Voice over Internet Protocol VPN Virtual Private Network VPS Voice Processing System X XDP eXtra Device Port 370 Feature Guide Index Feature Guide 371 Index A Absent Message 166 Absent Message 008 327 Account Code Entry 73 Account Code Mode 508 347 Administrative Information Output Features 225 Advice of Charge AOC 183 Alternate Calling Ring Voice 70 Alternate Receiving Calling Mode Ring Voice Override 67 Alternate Receiving Ring Voice 70 ANI gt Automatic Number Identification ANI 156 Answering Features 64 Answering Features SUMMARY 64 AOC gt Advice of Charge AOC 183 Appendix 363 ARS Carrier Access Code 353 335 ARS Carrier Name 350
227. ion Group Floating Extension Number 622 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY PS Ring Group Used to call a PS ring group 1 23 2 PS Ring Group VM DPT Group Used to call a VM DPT group VM Group Floating Extension Number 660 M DTMF Group Used to call a VM DTMF group Conditions e tis possible to give names to floating extension numbers Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 623 Outgoing Message OGM Name 731 Feature Guide References 1 22 1 Voice Mail VM Group 2 3 1 PC Programming Feature Guide 305 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 Software Upgrading Description It is possible to upload software from a personal computer to the PBX to upgrade the following Data File Storage Area Main Processing MPR Operating system data area on either the software data MPR card of the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or the Main Board of the KX TDA30 Default data of system Country area data area on the MPR card or programming for each country Main Board area Language data for PT display Each language data area on the MPR card or Main Board There are two types Type 1 PT display except for PT system programming 2 3 2 PT Programming five languages max Type 2 PT system programming data one language max LPR software on a slot card Flash ROM on the slot card eg BRI8 software data KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only Cell Station CS software
228. ion and leave notification on the corresponding extension if the called extension is not able to answer calls 1 VM Group Type A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration VM DTMF Group features A maximum of two VM DTMF groups can be assigned A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration features With the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 A maximum of two VM DPT groups can be assigned One Panasonic KX TVS KX TVP system can be in only one group A maximum of 12 ports 24 channels of the VPS can form each group With the KX TDA30 e One VM DPT group can be assigned e A maximum of 4 ports 8 channels of the VPS can form a group VM DPT Group Feature Guide 199 1 22 Voice Mail Features 200 Feature Guide Example lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt VM DPT Group VM DTMF Group Floating extn no 100 Floating extn no 250 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 117 Extn 118 Extn 119 Extn 120 DPT Digital Integration DTMF Integration lt KX TDA30 gt e VM DPT Group Floating extn no 100 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt VM DTMF Group Floating extn no 200 or Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 201 Extn 202 Extn 203 Extn 204 DPT Digital Integration DTMF Integration VM DTMF Group Assignment The
229. ion data and or the PBX system data A stored number is dialled automatically with a simple operation 1 Features One touch Dialling Personal Programming e 1 6 1 2 One e System Programming touch Dialling PC Programming only KX T7710 One touch System Programming e 1 6 1 3 KX Dialling KX TDA100 PC Programming only T7710 One touch KX TDA200 only Dialling KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only Last Number Redial The last dialled telephone number s e 1 6 1 4 Last Outgoing Call Log automatically stored Number Redial Personal Personal Programming e 1 6 1 5 Speed Personal Operation with the Feature Dialling Number Personal System System Programming PC Programming only System Programming Quick Dialling System Programming e 1 6 1 6 Quick PC Programming only Dialling Hot Line Personal Programming e 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Personal Operation with the Feature Number System Programming PC Programming only Incoming Call Log Incoming call information is automatically e 1 16 2 Incoming stored Call Log Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 2 Valid Input Display while ven Dr 2 0 9 0 9 Stores the digits and PAUSE Pause Stores a pause by pressing the PAUSE button gt 1 5 4 6 Pause Insertion beginning of the number 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA INTERCOM Conceals all or part of the number by pressing the Secret INTERCOM button at the
230. ion personal identification number PIN Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 005 is required to use this feature gt 1 25 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN If the wrong PIN is entered three times the line will be disconnected e Remote operation is not available for the extensions in the Internal Call Block mode 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block User Manual References User Manual 1 2 9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA Remote Setting Feature Guide 239 1 26 Audible Tone Features 1 26 Audible Tone Features 1 26 1 Dial Tone Description The following dial tones inform extensions about features activated on the extensions Each dial tone type has two frequencies e g dial tone 1A and dial tone 1B Tone 1A 1B A normal dial tone is heard when a No features listed for dial tones 2 through 4 has been set or b ARS is used Tone 2A 2B Any one of the features below is set Absent Message BGM FWD Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting DND Extension Lock Executive Busy Override Deny Hot Line Timed Reminder Tone 3A 3B While a called PS is being searched or any one of the features below is performed e Account Code Entry e Consultation Hold e Answering a Timed Reminder call with no message Tone 4A 4B Messages are waiting for the extension Conditions e Dial Tone Type A B It is possible to select dial tone type A or B for dial tones 1
231. istribution group is a group of extensions programmed through system programming Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 620 An incoming call distribution group receives calls directed to the group Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions in the group using a distribution method When a preprogrammed number of extensions in the group are busy the incoming calls can wait in a queue Each incoming call distribution group and member extensions can be programmed as desired to handle incoming calls Calls to the group can be monitored by an extension assigned as a Supervisor Supervisor extension Programming Item Example for Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 with Diagram A through F in the ar are RE in the following diagram ng eg Group Distribution ren No of GR Hurry up Overflow Destination Tenant Extn No Time i Name Method Extensions ee Level Day Night No NN Sales Ring 13 15 B 160 1100 100 M 2 21 engineering UCD Max 118 190 1200 18 WEB e RE EG EENEG Ep Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 622 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 623 Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method 624 Maximum Number of Agents 632 gt Queuing Call Capacity 628 gt Queuing Hurry up Le
232. k Security All Security Is the dialled number an extension number or floating extension number No gt Is the Walking COS Verified C Code Entry feature number dialled Goes to for Security Mode Override What is the dialled number No Yes Is the correct personal identification number PIN entered Extension No NO Tue mm D Floating Extension No Goes to E mE EM EN C Yes Feature No e g FWD Goes to D The feature is set The dialled number is sent to the trunk Trunk Access No Telephone No Does the caller press X while hearing reorder tone Call Retry No Is the extension idle DISA Reorder Tone Duration Time Time out Goes to The call is disconnected Yes Is the extension busy Call Waiting mode on and is not in DND mode The extension receives the call What method is assigned The call waits for DISA Intercept Does the caller press X to be received Routing Busy DND while hearing a ringback tone Call Retry The extension Intercept Routing Outgoing becomes idle Message OGM Busy Tone Does the caller press X while hearing busy tone Call Retry Does the destination answer the call Goes to A Goes to E DISA Intercept Time Time out Yes The message for The call is routed to the The call is disconnected the busy DND mode interc
233. k cards and extension cards should be done as per system programming so that conversation is maintained when the power is restored and the MPR is recovering The BHI8 one port and BRI4 one port cards can also be used for Power Failure Connections For details about Power Failure Connections refer to the Installation Manual KX TDA30 Ports 1 and 2 of the LCOTA card installed in the least slot number and ports 1 and 2 of the super hybrid ports can be used for Power Failure Connections Note The Power Failure Connections between the LCOT4 card and super hybrid ports are automatically kept so that the conversation is maintained when the power is restored and the Main Board is recovering The BRI2 one port card can also be used for Power Failure Connections For details about Power Failure Connections refer to the Installation Manual Feature Guide 307 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 308 Installation Manual References Installation Manual Feature Guide lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 2 6 Backup Batteries Connection 2 12 1 Power Failure Connections lt KX TDA30 gt 6 2 6 Backup Batteries Connection 6 11 1 Power Failure Connections 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 2 Power Failure Restart Description When turning the electricity back on the PBX restarts the stored data automatically and the PBX will record the event System Restart in the error log Conditions e Inthe event of a power failure P
234. k with the toll carrier concerned Caller ID to SLT Port KX TDA30 only Hardware Requirement The EXT CID card Up to 8 SLTs can be programmed to receive caller s information through system programming When the caller s number is sent to an SLT a Trunk Access number can be automatically added to the telephone number through system programming for calling back When the caller s number exceeds 16 digits the SLT receives only the first 16 digits not counting the preceding Trunk Access number if it is programmed to be added If a call is transferred to an SLT the transferring extension s information will be shown on the SLT If the transferring extension goes on hook the original caller s information will be shown When the Caller ID has information such as private out of area or long distance the information will be shown instead of the callers number and name Feature Guide 159 1 16 Caller ID Features e Foran SLT that is connected to a PT in parallel Caller ID information is available only when the SLT is set to ring e Even if the callers name is sent the name may not be shown depending on the type of SLT e Incoming Call Log information is not shown on the SLT Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 160 Feature Guide 1 16 Caller ID Features 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log Description When an incoming public trunk
235. kbps x 30 channels VoIP Internet Protocol IP BRI PRI QSIG Digital ISDN 2B D 30B D 23B D A trunk which is used for a private network should be assigned Private as the networking type 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Explanation 1 Making a TIE Line Call One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE line call a Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code Dial the Extension Number only Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features Example TTT IE A E AN O ITI X e 5 I O sch Extn 1011 Extn 1012 Extn Dials 3011 Dials 2011 Explanation To use this method it is necessary to change the first one or two digits of extension numbers of either PBX e g 10XX for PBX 1 20XX for PBX 2 to avoid having the same extension number Case 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials extension number 2011 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 2011 of PBX 2 Case 2 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials extension number 3011 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 3011 of PBX 3 b PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code Dial the TIE Line Access Number PBX Code Extension Number Example PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX 3 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 PBX Code 953 A E E Extn 1011 Extn 1012 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 Dials 7 953 1011 Dials oo 1 PBX code TIE line access no Ext
236. l or International the following modification table is used instead of the above table lt Modification Table gt Removed No of Digits Added No Subscriber Call Data National Call Data International Call Data Feature Guide 157 158 1 16 Caller ID Features lt Modification Flowchart gt A trunk call with the caller s information is received Checks the Table Selection Table 1 Is the area code found in local international data in the modification table Yes e g 00987654321 Checks the local international call data Matches Data 2 No e g 3344556677 Checks the long distance call data Modifies the number as programmed Removed number of digits 2 Added number 001 Received number 00987654321 A Modified number 00987654321 001987654321 Modifies the number as programmed Removed number of digits 0 Added number 0 1 Remove the 2 Add 001 first 2 digits Modification is completed Modification is completed 03344556677 001987654321 3 2 Caller ID Table Assignment The System Speed Dialling Table is also used as the Caller ID Table In each location of the table the following items can be assigned a Telephone number Trunk Access number caller s telephone number b System Speed Dialling name caller s name shown on the display or SMDR c CLI destination used for CLI feature When a caller s modified telephone numb
237. l distribution groups to which the extension belongs will skip the extension so that he can make some report or etc Wrap up mode can also be activated manually Not Ready by pressing the Wrap up button Log in Log out and Wrap up Status Example lt When the incoming call distribution group is in Priority Hunting distribution method gt Incoming call Ready J De for a pr Press the NX Nag up button ot Read Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn Answering a call The Wrap up Making Sech 101 102 103 104 105 106 time expires temporary break Ready Ready Not Ready Wrap up Ready P l l l After completing Press the the call d Wrap up button Y Wrap up Extn Making a report 102 Log out Conditions e Generally there should be at least one extension in a group that is logged in However all extensions can log out if permitted through system programming e Log in Log out Button A flexible button can be customised as the Log in Log out button with the following parameters Light Pattern Light Pattern Parameter No parameter Used with an ICD Group button or with a floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or with x All 52 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Light Pattern arameter Redon Of Floating extension Used to log in or log out from the Log out Log in number of a specified incoming call distribution
238. l mode Calls have been distributed by DIL DID DDI CLI The number in the circle is the queuing order Y Y Y Incoming Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Distribution Distribution Distribution Distribution Group 1 6 Group 2 5 Group 3 4 Group 4 for VIP for general for special for general 1 customers customers 2 customers 3rd Priority 3rd ist A Priory 2nd Priority Priority Extn Extn Extn 101 102 103 From Group 1 Group 3 Groups 2 and 4 Feature Guide 49 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 5 Overflow Feature Description When waiting calls exceed the waiting queue capacity Queuing Call Capacity 628 they may be redirected to a preprogrammed destination or busy tone may be sent to the callers by the following features 1 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group 2 Busy on Busy 1 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group The Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works in one of following conditions a There is no space in the waiting queue b The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in C An Overflow command is assigned to the Queuing Time Table d The Overflow time Overflow Time 626 expires e Manual Queue Redirection is performed Available Destination The overflow destinations can be assigned for each incoming
239. laced into service Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA e A COS should be assigned for each extension Class of Service 602 e TRS Barring checks are applied to the following ARS Trunk Access Idle Line Trunk Group S CO Line e It is programmable whether X or is checked by the TRS Barring This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls which could be possible through certain telephone company exchanges e It is programmable whether TRS Barring checks the digits dialled after the External Feature Access during a trunk call 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA e Host PBX Access Code Special Carrier Access Code TRS Barring checks for numbers dialled with a Host PBX Access code 1 5 4 7 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX ora Special Carrier Access code 1 5 4 8 Special Carrier Access Code in the following cases Not stored Host PBX Deletes the code A The call is made TRS Barring checks Access Code TRS Barring check is excepted from TRS the whole number carried out on the Barring following digits Special Carrier Deletes the code A TRS Barring checks TRS Barring checks Access Code TRS Barring check i
240. le if vo data for your country area b Click Next C Follow the instructions of the wizard d Click Finish e Click OK e To install or uninstall the software into Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional the user must be grouped either of Administrators or Power Users e To connect the PC to the PBX via USB the KX TDA USB driver must have been installed Follow the instructions of the wizard to install the KX TDA USB driver e The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice Starting the Maintenance Console and Assigning the Basic Items Quick Setup When you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code and connect to the PBX for the first time after initialisation with the factory default setting Quick Setup will launch automatically For details about Quick Setup items refer to Section 2 3 3 Quick Setup 1 Connect the PC to the PBX with a USB cable 2 Start the KX TDA Maintenance Console or KX TDA30 Maintenance Console from the start menu 316 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming SS 3 Type the Installer Level Programmer Code default 1234 then click OK er Frogrammer Code The Programmer Code authorises different programming levels and the Quick Setup is za mm only available when you start the Maintenance Console with the Installer Level Programmer Code Note There are 2 other Programmer
241. le Numbering Table available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard Call Waiting DND Override Executive Busy Override Message Waiting set Call Monitor Automatic Callback Busy CCBS Alternate Calling Ring Voice To use Call Waiting DND Override both 1 and 2 are available by default Feature Guide 303 2 3 System Data Control 304 3 Fixed Numbering available while dialling or talking The features which are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers as shown in the following table Fixed Numbering Table available while dialling or talking Fixed Numbering Conditions The PBX has default for numbers The following are examples of feature number conflicts 1 and 11 0 and 00 2 and 21 10 and 101 32 and 321 etc Feature number Additional number Parameter Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active For example to set Call Waiting the feature number for Call Waiting must be followed by 1 and to cancel it the same feature number should be followed by 0 If a feature number includes X or rotary SLT users cannot use it ISDN extension users cannot use the following features OGM playback record Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve held at its own extension ISDN Hold MCID Walking Extension Call Waiting Hot Line Timed Reminder Executive Busy Override Call Monitor Automatic Call
242. le afterwards e If the account code is entered more than once the code entered last is printed out in the SMDR e Even in Forced mode emergency numbers can be dialled out without an account code 1 5 4 2 Emergency Call e PT users can also enter an account code for incoming trunk calls during a conversation e Verified Code Entry To identify who made a trunk call for accounting and billing purpose a verified code is used This code can be used at any extension 1 8 6 Verified Code Entry Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR User Manual References User Manual 1 2 1 Basic Calling Feature Guide 73 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Description The dialling mode rotary or tone can be selected for each analogue trunk through system programming LCOT Dialling Mode 410 regardless of originating extension under contract with the telephone company There are the following modes Besorlptlon DTMF Dual Tone The dialling signal from an extension is converted to tone dialling Multi Frequency DTMF signals are transmitted to the trunk Pulse Dial Rotary The dialling signal from an extension is converted to rotary dialling Rotary pulses are transmitted to the trunk Conditions e Pulse to Tone Conversion It is possible for an extension user to temporarily convert the Pulse mode to DTMF mode so that
243. lection can also be reassigned to other features PF Programmable Feature nies bs CH a preprogrammed feature with one touch Conditions e Certain buttons are equipped with a light to show line or feature status Feature Guide 169 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons Description Flexible buttons are customised by either system or personal programming The following types of flexible buttons are provided on PTs DSS Consoles Add on Key Modules and or PSs a Flexible CO buttons b Flexible Direct Station Selection DSS buttons C Programmable Feature PF buttons Button Usage Single CO S CO Used to access a specified trunk for making or receiving calls Group CO G CO Used to access an idle trunk in a specified trunk group for making calls Incoming calls from trunks in the assigned trunk group arrive at this button Loop CO L CO Used to access an idle trunk for making calls Incoming calls from any trunk arrive at this button Direct Station Selection Used to access an extension with one touch One touch Dialling Used to access a preprogrammed party or feature with one touch Incoming Call Distribution Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group ICD Group for making or receiving calls Message Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication FWD DND External Used to perform the FWD or DND fea
244. lects the corresponding trunk group and the dialled number is modified if a removed number of digits and or added number is assigned Is the trunk group available Reorder tone Is there an idle trunk in the trunk group Busy tone Routes to other PBX or trunk 258 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features Receiving a Call through a TIE Line lt Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code gt A call is received through a TIE line as follows 1021 The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port Removed number of digits 1 Added number None Received number 1021 d Modified number A 102121021 Remove the first 1 digit PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code A call is received through a TIE line as follows 0511033 The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port Hemoved number of digits 3 Added number 9 Received number 0511033 d Modified number 9511033 9511033 1 Remove the first 3 digits 2 Add 9 Does the modified number have the own PBX code 951 Yes 9511033 Goes to A Removes the own PBX A is in the code 951 flowchart of Making a TIE Line Call from an 1021 1033 Checks the modified number with the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX Idle Line Access No Extension Others Operator Call No Directs the call to the operator of the Own PBX of Oth
245. led information for each extension 1 SMDR Output Port The Serial Interface RS 232C port can be used to output the SMDR data The following devices can be connected e Serial Interface RS 232C port Personal computer PC printer etc SMDR Output Data The following data will be recorded and sent to the SMDR output port a Trunk call information incoming outgoing b Intercom call information outgoing C Log in Log out information d PBX error log 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information Memory for SMDR A specified number of call information can be memorised for each PBX If more calls are originated or received the oldest data is overwritten by the newest one Feature Guide 225 1 24 Administrative Information Output Features 3 SMDR Format Type and Contents There are the following three types of output format which can be selected through system programming Pattern A 80 digits without call charge information Date Time CO Dial Number i Duration ACC Code CD 8 digits 7 10 01 02 02 10 03AM lt l gt 12345678901234567890 515 00 00 00 01 02 02 10 07AM lt l gt 0 05 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 02 10 15AM 1234567890123456 00 01 05 9876543210 TR 01 02 02 10 30AM 1234567890123456 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 02 01 07PM lt I gt ABC COMPANY12345678 0 05 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 02 01 07PM lt D gt CDE9876 lt I gt Q COMPANY 0 05 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 02 01 07PM ABC COMPANY 12345678 00 01 05 01 02 02 01 07PM
246. ll Announcement OHCA 98 Off hook Monitor 117 OGM gt Outgoing Message OGM 147 OHCA gt Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 98 One touch Dialling 86 One touch Transfer 129 OPB3 Option Card Deletion 911 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 362 OPB3 Option Card Type Reference 910 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 362 Operator Assignment 006 326 Operator Call 289 Operator Features 289 Index Optional Device Features 142 Outgoing Call Log 88 Outgoing Message OGM 147 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 730 358 Outgoing Message OGM Name 731 359 Overflow Feature 50 Overflow Time 626 351 P Paging 139 Paging Deny 139 Paging DND 63 141 Paging Features 139 Paging Group 189 Parallelled Telephone 124 Password Security 314 Pause Insertion 76 Pay Tone Signal Type 491 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 345 PC Phone PC Console Features 5 PC Programming 292 315 Permission for Door Open Access 512 348 Personal Identification Number PIN for PS Registration 692 356 Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock 89 Pickup Dialling Hot Line 91 PIN gt Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 234 PIN gt Verified Code Personal Identification Number PIN 109 Portable Station PS Connection 215 Portable Station PS Features 5 215 Power Failure Connections 307 Power Failure Restart 309 Power Failure Transfer 307 Predialling 68 Prime Line Preference 65 81 Priority Hunting
247. ll Park Recall If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Call Park Recall will be heard at the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which parked the call If the destination is engaged in a call the Hold Alarm will be heard If a parked trunk call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Default 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected Call Park Button Pressing the Call Park button parks or retrieves a call in a preset parking zone A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park button It shows the current status of the preset parking zone as follows Light pattern Off No parked call Slow red flashing Parked in the preset parking zone Call Park Automatic Park Zone Button Pressing the Call Park Automatic Park Zone button parks a call in an idle parking zone automatically A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park Automatic Park Zone button Call Park Retrieve Deny If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block he cannot retrieve the parked call which the extensions made Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 132 Feature Guide 1 4 2 Holding a Call 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 3 Call Splitting Description An extension user can alternate between two other parties Placing the current call on hold allows the user to have a co
248. ll not be activated Programming Example of Queuing Time Table Queuing Sequence Time Table 2 Sequence Sequence Sequence Sequence No 02 03 04 16 lt REMIT L9 o 4 rar fa por jor Jo Ir 1 Sequences in Queuing Time Table 631 2 The call will be disconnected if the destination is not determined after sequence 16 Feature Guide 47 1 2 Receiving Group Features Explanation for Queuing Time Table 01 Queuing Time Table 01 The call Sequence 01 Sequence 02 Sequence 03 Sequence 04 Overflow eca o queues OGM 01 is sent Music on Hold OGM 03 is sent Redirects to destination is sent for 30 the overflow answers Thank you for d We are sorry to calling Panasonic SE keep you holding The department you The department are calling is busy is still busy We Please hold the line are transferring We will answer your you to the call shortly operator destination The call is connected to the member extension as soon as the extension becomes available Conditions e Ifthe call is transferred to the incoming call distribution group and is handled by the Queuing Time Table Transfer Recall will not occur even if the Transfer Recall time expires e Manual Queue Redirection It is possible to redirect the longest waiting call in a queue to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry up button When the call is already ringing on any extension the call is not redirected This featu
249. llow on ID to the VPS e tis possible to assign the time period between when the VPS transfers the call using the AA service to the PBX and the PBX sends the DTMF status signal to the VPS e Itis possible to select whether the mailbox number is the same as the extension number or the mailbox number is programmable for each extension number and incoming call distribution group Mailbox Access ID e The Inter digit time for the DTMF command and for DT MF status signal is programmable e Data Line Security is set automatically on the extensions in the VM DTMF group to achieve proper recording gt 1 10 5 Data Line Security Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 208 Feature Guide 1 22 Voice Mail Features 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 1 11 1 Call Transfer 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons 1 22 1 Voice Mail VM Group User Manual References User Manual 1 9 3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Feature Guide 209 1 22 Voice Mail Features 1 22 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 210 Description A Panasonic VPS that supports DPT Digital Integration eg the KX TVP200 can be connected to this PBX in a tightly integrated fashion DPT Digital Integration features can be used when the VPS is connected through DPT ports of th e PBX Feature Explanation 1 Feature Guide Automatic Configuration Quick Setup The PBX informs the VPS of its extension numbers and the flo
250. make the following tables a Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code TIE Line Network P a Extn 4xxx Extn 3xxx If you dial a 2xxx b 3xxx JE c xx TTS 2 3 4 Other PBX Extension Number TIE in the Flexible Numbering Plan l X X Extn 1xxx Extn 2xxx 244 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 m Location Leading Dial Modification Dial Modification m No No Trunk Removed Trunk Removed Group 0 No Selil o J J h 09 31 oe 2 o IL 09 4120 ll EENEG Explanation Location 01 The hunt sequence by dialling 2XXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 gt Sending no to PBX 2 2XXX Location 02 The hunt sequence by dialling 3XXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 gt Sending no to PBX 2 3XXX The 2nd route trunk group TRG 2 gt Sending no to PBX 4 3XXX Location 03 The hunt sequence by dialling AXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 2 gt Sending no to PBX 4 4XXX b PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code TIE Line Network PBX 4 PBX PBX Code 954 PBX Code 953 ji Extn XXXX mmm Extn XXxx If you dial a 7 952 xxxx b 7 953 x00x d c 7 954 xxxx TT 7 TIE Line Access Extn 1xxx Number in the Flexible PBX 1 PBX Numbering Plan PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 m
251. mber extensions in a certain order This order depends on the type UCD or Priority Hunting Calls will arrive at idle buttons until all ICD Group buttons are occupied additional calls will wait in a queue Feature Guide 45 1 2 Receiving Group Features 46 Note In the method b if an extension has one or more ICD Group buttons for an incoming call distribution group and all the ICD Group buttons on the extension are occupied the Group Call Waiting feature for the group will not work at the extension Incoming Call Y Incoming Call Y Distribution Distribution Group 1 Group 2 Floating Floating extension extension no 200 no 300 gt ICD Group 200 Call Waiting ICD Group 300 Answering the Call No Reply Redirection UCD or Priority Hunting Method If a call received at a member extension is not answered within a preprogrammed time period No Answer time the call will be redirected to the next member extension If there is no idle group member the call queues at target extension until a group member becomes available Conditions FWD DND Extension System programming for each incoming call distribution group is required to skip or ring the extension which has FWD or DND feature set If it rings the FWD DND settings are ignored 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Group Call Waiting feature cannot be used with the VIP Call feature 1 2 2 4 VIP Call and or Wrap up f
252. mm a 952 xxxx b 1st 953 xxxx Extn XXXX Feature Guide 245 1 27 Networking Features TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 n Dial Modification Dial Modification Location Leading No No Trunk Removed Trunk Removed Group eds Group 0 ein EE pe pe pete Petey J s Explanation Location 01 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 PBX Code 952 XXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 P Sending no to PBX 2 952 XXXX Location 02 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 PBX Code 953 XXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 P Sending no to PBX 2 953 XXXX The 2nd route trunk group TRG 2 P Sending no to PBX 4 X X9534 XXXX Location 03 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 PBX Code 954 XXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 2 P Sending no to PBX 4 X X9544 XXXX 246 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features 2 2 To Receive a TIE Line Call a Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code Example TIE Line Network A TIE line call is sent to PBX 2 7 from PBX 1 If the number sent from PBX 1 is an extension number of PBX 2 e g 2011 o the call will be received at Extn 3011 extension 2011 If not PBX 2 checks the number in the TIE Line Routing and Modified Table of PBX 2 If the match is found in the A table the call will be modified B according to the table and send Extn 1011 Extn 2011 to
253. mmed time period the call is automatically disconnected This timer starts when Hold Recall activates Automatic Call Hold A PT user can be programmed holding of the current call when pressing another CO ICD Group INTERCOM button through system programming If this feature is not enabled the current call will be disconnected Example It is possible to receive a call by pressing the flashing ICD Group button this puts the current intercom call on the INTERCOM button on hold To return to the held call press the INTERCOM button Call Hold Retrieve Deny If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block he cannot retrieve the held call which the extensions made SLT Hold Mode It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT in the following methods through system programming 1 12 Holding Features Hold Transfer to Trunk Transfer to Extension Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Going on hook Trunk Access No Extension No Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Hold Feature No Trunk Access No Extension No Going on hook Default Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Hold Feature No Hold Feature No Extension No Going on hook Trunk Access No Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flash
254. mming LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration 412 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 412 gt Semi gt KI 01 10 01 16 80 160 ms ENTER ENTER KX TDA30 412 gt gt Slot No gt PortNo er 53 gr 02 04 01 04 80 160 ms GER END LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing 413 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 413 gt Slot No Port No gt Mode No gt 9 EI 01 16 0 None 1 6 5 END ENTER 2 113 N 1 x8 ms ENTER KX TDA30 413 gt 9 gt Slot No gt Port No gt Mode No Mode No gt r 01 04 0 None 1 6 5 END ENTER 2 113 N 1 x8ms ENTER LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Incoming 414 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 414 gt 8 Soria gt Fori DS e EI 01 16 0 None 1 6 5 END ENTER 2 113 N 1 x8ms ENTER KX TDA30 414 gt e gt Slot No gt Port No gt Mode No J gt r 02 04 01 04 0 None 1 6 5 END ENTER 2 113 N 1 x8 ms ENTER 338 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming LCOT Reverse Circuit 415 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 415 e Feel Foto E gt e 01 10 01 16 Disable ENTER Outgoing Both Call ENTER KX TDA30 415 gt e tie Fono gt KI 02 04 01 04 Disable END ENTER Outgoing Both Call ENTER LCOT Pause Time 416 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 416 gt e Taas Porno gt gt gt KI 01 10 01 16 1 5 2 5 END ENTER 35 45 s ENTER KX TDA30 416 gt gal Porto
255. mming LCOT Reverse Circuit 415 Feature Guide 75 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 6 Pause Insertion Description A preprogrammed Pause time gt LCOT Pause Time 416 will be inserted manually or automatically Manual Insertion Pressing the PAUSE button Automatic Pause Insertion A pause will be automatically inserted between the user dialled codes below and the following digits a Host PBX Access code 1 5 4 7 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX b Special Carrier Access code 1 5 4 8 Special Carrier Access Code C Second Dial Tone Waiting code Conditions e The Pause time is programmable for each trunk e Pause can be stored in Memory Dialling e Pressing the PAUSE button while dialling a number inserts a pause for a preprogrammed time period e When a preprogrammed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk pauses are inserted a preprogrammed number of times after the code 76 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 7 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Description This PBX can be installed behind an existing host PBX This is performed by connecting extension ports of the host PBX to trunk ports of this PBX A Host PBX Access code assigned through system programming Host PBX Access Code 471 is required to access the telephone company from the host PBX The Trunk Access n
256. mode User Manual References User Manual 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 7 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND Feature Guide 63 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 1 Answering Features SUMMARY Description An extension user can answer incoming calls by the following methods Destination Feature Description tala in At the own Line A user can select the line seized when going 1 4 1 2 extension Preference Line PT only Incoming Preference Incoming Direct One A user can answer an incoming call simply touch by pressing the flashing button Answering Hands free A user can receive a call automatically and 1 4 1 4 Answerback establish a hands free conversation Hands free Answerback At another Call Pickup A user can pick up a specified extensions 1 4 1 3 Call extension Directed Group call or a call in a specified call pickup group Pickup 64 Feature Guide 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming Description A PT user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences Each of these line preferences can be assigned on each extension through personal programming Preferred Line Assignment Incoming No Line Selects a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer an incoming call after you go off hook Prime Li
257. n The FWD DND button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Status default Red on FWD on Slow red flashing DND on Off FWD DND off The functions assigned to the on and flashing patterns can be changed through system programming Button Status Group FWD Button The Group FWD button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Status default Red on FWD on Off FWD off Mode Change When either the FWD or DND feature is assigned pressing the FWD DND button changes the on off setting alternately When both the features are assigned simultaneously pressing the button changes the settings as follows S FWD gt DND Off 7 Note Pressing the FWD DND button fixed button in idle status will produce one of the following results selected through system programming When in FWD DND Setting Mode Pressing the button will enter personal programming mode for the FWD DND setting When in FWD DND Cycle Switch Mode Pressing the button will cycle the settings as shown above in Mode Change A FWD DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD DND Cycle Switch mode and the mode cannot be changed When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from trunk calls forwarding type forward destination DND on off we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD DND Internal and FWD DND External and or Group FWD Internal and Group FWD External because a the lig
258. n no Feature Guide 243 1 27 Networking Features Explanation To use this method it is necessary to know each PBX code in order to identify the location of an extension Case 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 and extension number 1011 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX 2 Case 2 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials TIE line access number 7 PBX code 953 and extension number 1011 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX 3 2 TIE Line Routing and Modification Table 2 1 To Make a TIE Line Call The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table is referenced by the PBX to identify the trunk route when an extension user makes a TIE line call It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs in the TIE line network The routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the dialled number There are two system programmes for the tables TIE Line Routing Table used to assign the leading numbers PBX code or extension number and trunk group hunt sequence TIE Modify Removed Number of Digits Added Number used to remove digits from and add a number to the dialled number of the TIE line call This modification may be needed depending on the TIE line network configuration Programming Examples Your PBX is PBX 1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line network To identify the trunk route as illustrated you should
259. n Access 512 348 Time Service Manual Switching ID14l 348 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone 515 348 Programming Mode Limitation 516 348 lt 420 FOT TN 349 EXtra Device Port XDP Mode TGO0 349 Terminal Device Assignment 601 349 NNN 349 VEI Group 603 EEE 350 Extension Intercept Destination IGO4l 350 Call Forwarding No Answer Time 602 350 GLE GP Number Ne 350 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member TeG20t nn 350 Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing 621 350 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number IG22 esses 351 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 6293 nnn 351 Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method IG241
260. n extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access method 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access Leading Number Exception Table 2 Assignment Store the telephone numbers that will avoid using the ARS feature 2 ARS Leading Number Exception Table Location Leading No Exception No 033555 06456 1 gt ARS Exception Number 325 Leading Number Table 3 Assignment otore the area codes and or telephone numbers as leading number that will be routed by the ARS feature In this table the Routing Plan refer to 4 Routing Plan Table Assignment is selected for each number The additional remain number of digits must be assigned only when ft for example is needed after a dialled number The is added after the assigned number of digits of dialled number excluding a leading number 8 ARS Leading Number Table Location Leading Additional Remain Routing Plan No No No of Digits Table No 2 0001 0002 0003 0444 I ARS Leading Number 321 2 gt ARS Routing Plan Table Number 322 If a dialled number matches a leading number the number will be modified according to the corresponding Routing Plan Table and the modified number will be sent to the trunk when the assigned additional remain number of digits are dialled or the Inter digit time expires If a dialled number matches multiple leading number entries the leading number entry with the lowest numbered location will have priority 1 9 Autom
261. n their own telephone at once Absent Message BGM FWD DND Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting Data Line Security Executive Busy Override Deny Log in Log out Message Waiting Paging Deny Parallelled Telephone Hot Line Timed Reminder Disable In Canada the default setting is Enable Call Waiting tone All messages left by other extensions Will be cleared Paired SLT will ring Note The features with can be programmed not to be cancelled by this feature This feature is also known as Station Programme Clear Conditions e Extension Lock 1 8 3 Extension Lock and the extension personal identification number PIN 1 25 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN will not be cleared by this feature e For Users in Canada only If dial tone 2 is heard after Extension Feature Clear After performing Extension Feature Clear Call Waiting will be enabled if Extension Clear Call Waiting is set to Clear through system programming In this case dial tone 2 will be heard when going off hook 1 26 1 Dial Tone User Manual References User Manual 1 7 13 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension Extension Feature Clear Feature Guide 1 25 Extension Controlling Features 1 25 3 Walking Extension Description It is possible to use any extension and have your extension settings available to you Settings such as extension number one touch dialling memory and COS are all available
262. nal Background Music BGM Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 5 Outgoing Message OGM Description An extension assigned as the manager manager extension can record outgoing messages OGMs for the following features Direct Inward System When a call arrives on a DISA line the caller will 1 15 6 Direct Access DISA hear a message Inward System Access DISA Queuing Feature If assigned in the Queuing Time Table of the e 1 2 2 3 incoming call distribution group Sequences in Queuing Queuing Time Table 631 any caller who is Feature waiting in a queue will hear a message Timed Reminder When answering the Timed Reminder Alarm the 1 25 4 user will hear a message Timed Reminder Conditions e Hardware Requirement KX TDA100 KX TDA200 The OPB card and MSG card KX TDA30 The MSG card e The Number of Messages and the Recording Time A maximum of 64 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 32 with the KX TDA30 messages can be recorded The recording time per message is a maximum of one minute However the total recording time in the PBX is 8 minutes e A floating extension number can be assigned to each outgoing message OGM Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 730 e One MSG card allows 4 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 2 with the KX TDA30 messages to play simultaneously The MSG card expansion does not increase the total recording time or the number of messages It inc
263. nation cannot be found the calling extension will hear the DND tone while the calling outside party will hear busy tone Conditions DND for Trunk Calls Intercom Calls The DND feature can be set for trunk calls for intercom calls or for both of them by the extension user DSS button in DND Mode The DSS button light will turn red if the assigned extension has set DND DND Override An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their COS gt DND Override 507 Paging DND It is programmable whether the PBX pages extensions in DND mode through system programming 1 14 1 Paging Intercept Routing Busy DND If a call arrives at the extension in DND mode the call can be redirected to the preprogrammed destination by the Intercept Routing Busy DND feature Idle Extension Hunting While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group any extension which has DND set will be skipped The call will go to the next extension in the group not the Intercept Routing Busy DND destination If 1 the trunk call via the LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card arrives at the extension in DND mode and 2 the Intercept Routing Busy DND destination is not available and 3 there is no available extension in the idle extension hunting group then the original extension in DND mode will ring Calls from a doorphone arrive at the extension even when the extension is in DND
264. ncoming call to PBX 2 Trunk Group Number 500 like the programming example shown below TRS Barring applies to a TIE line call on a COS of the trunk group of the incoming call basis To override this prohibition access the DISA floating extension number of PBX 2 and enter a verified code to change the COS temporarily Programming Example of PBX 2 ee ee TRG of Incoming Outgoing Call Call TRG 1 TRG 2 1863 959 t Block 254 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features Example Telephone Company a Em m m m m TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX Code 951 952 9 01 23 4567 mmm e e mm e e mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm EE NE mm um mmu e TRG 1 COS 3 TIE Line of PBX 2 gt TRG 2 gt Interface 952 DISA Floating extn no verified code entry feature no x verified code verified code i Y NT U U Y PIN 9 01 23 4567 Extn 1011 Extn 1012 Dials 7 952 9 01 Dials 7 952 DISA Floating extn no 23 4567 verified code entry feature no Outside Party 01 23 4567 verified code verified code PIN 9 01 23 4567 Explanation Case 1 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 The call is not connected to the outside party 01 23 4567 through PBX 2 which has PBX
265. nd all ports of the VPS are busy tone Answer The called extension has answered the 5 call Feature Guide 207 1 22 Voice Mail Features FWD EXT RBT The PBX is calling an extension other FWD to extension than the one dialled FWD or Idle ringback tone Extension Hunting 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting may be assigned by the called extension Confirm The PBX receives confirmation that the confirmation tone feature has been successfully set or cancelled e g Message Waiting on the extension Disconnect The caller has hung up Example M An incoming call reaches the VPS The VPS greets the caller Thank you for calling Panasonic If you know the extension number of the person you wish Ke The caller dials the extension number extn 102 The VPS will transfer the call to the Buby Status extension via the PBX 3 Ifthe extension is not available the PBX sends DTMF status signal of the extension busy status to the VPS The VPS receives the DTMF status signal and send the appropriate message to the caller Sorry The extension is busy Would you like to leave a message Conditions e Voice Mail VM Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail VM Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter e Itis possible to assign the time period between when the VPS answers the call and the PBX sends the Fo
266. ne Answers a Call arriving at a Flexible CO or ICD Group button on which the Prime Line is assigned simply by going off hook This works even when multiple calls are received simultaneously Ringing Line Answers the longest ringing call at one s telephone simply by going default off hook when multiple calls arrive Conditions Prime Line e The priority of the incoming call is as follows 1 The call arriving at a button on which the Prime Line is assigned 2 The call arriving at the INTERCOM button User Manual References User Manual 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 65 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Description An extension user can answer a call ringing at any other extension The following types are available Directed A specified extension s call A call within a specified call pickup group Call Pickup Deny Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at your extension is also possible Conditions e Call Pickup applies to Intercom trunk and doorphone calls e Internal Call Block An extension which cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block also cannot pick up any calls ringing at those extensions Directed Call Pickup e A user can also pick up a specified extension s call except an ISDN extension s call by pressing the corresponding DSS button COS programming determines the extensions tha
267. nen nnne nennen nnne nnne nn nna n nsa sn isa sr ssa sra sa ansa nnns 325 Feature Guide 9 10 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 System Speed Dialling Number 001 325 System Speed Dialling Name 002 325 PANT 325 Extension Name 004 gt 326 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 005 326 Operator Assignment 006 326 Console Paired Telephone 007 326 Pose ad Message ln EE 327 Charge Margin LR ME 327 Gharge Tax OU 1 E 327 Charge Rate per Unit IO 327 VER 4010 10010011000 EEE O 328 Flexible Numbering OO 328 Time Service Switching Mode 101 328 Time Service Starting Time 102
268. network e 1 27 3 3 Call by QSIG Forwarding CF by QSIG Call Transfer CT by Transfers a call to the QSIG network e 1 27 3 4 Call QSIG Transfer CT by QSIG Completion of Calls to Receives callback ringing when a busy called 1 27 3 5 Busy Subscriber party on the QSIG network becomes free Completion of CCBS by QSIG Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG This feature is not available for the PRI23 card Feature Guide References 1 19 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 1 27 1 TIE Line Service 264 Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features 1 27 3 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Description Calling Line Name Identification Presentation CLIP CNIP The PBX can send a preprogrammed extension number and or name to the QSIG network when an extension user makes a call The called party can see the number and or name on his telephone display before answering the call Connected Line Name Identification Presentation COLP CONP The PBX sends a preprogrammed extension number and or name to the QSIG network when the extension user answers an incoming call The caller can see the number and or name of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications CLIP C
269. nference call is available Conditions e COS programming determines extension users who can use this feature e This feature is available only when the busy extension is in a conversation with another extension or outside party e This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions a Executive Busy Override Deny 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override or Data Line Security gt 1 10 5 Data Line Security has been set b While receiving OHCA 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA or Whisper OHCA 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA C During a Conference call 1 13 1 Conference Features d During a doorphone call 1 15 1 Doorphone Call e While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 22 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration f During Consultation Hold Consultation Hold Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting e his feature stops when the busy extension user presses the following buttons during a conversation 1 18 1 Fixed Buttons and 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons FLASH RECALL button HOLD button TRANSFER button CONF Conference button DSS button EFA button Two way Record button Two way Transfer button One touch Two way Transfer button Voice Mail VM Transfer button User Manual References User Manual 1 2 4 When the
270. nformation is not forwarded The Message button light turns on at the originally called extension 1 17 1 Message Waiting e Idle Extension Hunting Idle Extension Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in an idle extension hunting group All Calls and Busy e If the forward destination is not available to answer a call this feature is cancelled and the original destination will ring for the following type of call Doorphone call Trunk calls via the LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT cards No Answer and Busy No Answer e No Answer Time The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension Call Forwarding No Answer Time 605 Follow Me e This feature is only available when the original extension has disabled the Deny Remote Operation by Other Extension setting on a COS basis Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting 1 2 2 5 Overflow Feature User Manual References User Manual 1 5 1 Forwarding Calls Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND Description An extension user can make use of the DND feature If this feature is set calls will not arrive at the extension but arrive at other extension by using the Idle Extension Hunting feature 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting or the Intercept Routing Busy DND feature 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing When a desti
271. ng Permission for Door Open Access 512 512 gt gt 05 EH e 01 64 Disable END ENTER Enable ENTER Time Service Manual Switching 514 514 gt er COSNO gt SD gt 9 m 01 64 Disable ENTER Enable ENTER Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone 515 515 ee COSNo gt EB re a 01 64 Disable ENTER Enable ENTER Programming Mode Limitation 516 516 gt e COSNo gt SD er 01 64 Disable Personal END ENTER System amp Personal ENTER 348 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 8 Extension Programming EXtra Device Port XDP Mode 600 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 600 gt e gt Slot No gt PortNo gt Esc SELECT gt LQ E AUTO ANS MESSAGE 01 10 01 08 ENTER Off On ENTER HOLD To the Next Port No To the Desired Port No v NEXT CANCEL KX TDA30 600 gt 9 K IS PotNo gt ser gt gt 2D 01 04 AUTO ANS MESSAGE END ENTER Off On ENTER HOLD To the Next Port No To the Desired Port No NEXT CANCEL Terminal Device Assignment 601 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 601 gt er SlotNo gt PortNo gt EG rer END ENTER Scd 01716 Telephone Console 1 8 ENTER Voice Mail 1 1 12 Voice Mail 2 1 12 PC Console 1 8 KX TDA30 601 gt er SlotNo gt PortNo gt gt gt m ENTER lt 01 08 Telephone Console 1 4 ENTER SE Voice Mail 1 1 4 PC Console 1 2 Class of Service 602
272. ng 44 4 273 Denied Code Tables 100 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 625 351 Destination When All Busy 627 351 DialTone 240 Dial Tone Transfer 107 Dial Type Selection 74 Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation 123 DID Destination 453 343 DID Name 452 343 DID Number 451 343 DID gt Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 19 Digital XDP 124 DIL 1 1 Destination 450 343 DIL gt Direct In Line DIL 17 Direct In Line DIL 17 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 19 Direct Inward System Access DISA 149 Direct One touch Answering 64 Direct Trunk Access 82 Directed Call Pickup 66 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number DISA AA Service 149 DISA Continuous Signal Detection 476 344 DISA Cyclic Signal Detection 477 344 DISA Delayed Answer Time 209 332 DISA Intercept Routing Busy DND 150 DISA Intercept Routing No Answer 151 DISA Intercept Time 211 332 DISA Intercept No Dial 149 DISA Security Mode 732 359 DISA Security Mode and Available Features 149 DISA Silence Detection 475 344 DISA Trunk to Trunk Call Prolong Time 210 332 DISA gt Direct Inward System Access DISA 149 Display Information 175 DND Override 63 DND Override 507 347 DND gt Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 56 Do Not Disturb DND 63 DoorOpen 144 Door Open Duration Time 207 331 Doorphone Call 142 Doorphone Call Destination
273. nic Communications Co Ltd PCC You may print out this manual solely for internal use with this model Except above you may not reproduce this manual in any form in whole or part without the prior written consent of PCC 2003 Panasonic Communications Co Ltd All Rights Reserved PSQX2634XA KK0203CM2113
274. nsion user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free When the user answers the callback ringing that party s number is automatically dialled This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 366 Call completion supplementary services Conditions e This feature is available under the following conditions a The callers PBX is capable of using CCBS b The called party s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS e To receive and send CCBS receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN QSIG port basis through system programming e An extension user can set only one CCBS The last setting is effective e The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds User Manual References User Manual 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer Feature Guide 271 1 27 Networking Features 1 27 4 Voice over Internet Protocol VolP Network Description The PBX can connect to another PBX via an IP type private network In this case voice signals are converted into IP packets and sent through this network VolP network supports the private network communications by the TIE line service method Example PBX 1 Extn 1000 1 5 Extn 2000 FE 3 IP Private Network Router Extn 1999 Je Extn 2999 Dials 2999 i Extn 3000
275. nting is not available one of the following can be selected through system programming a Busy Tone Busy tone is sent to the caller Feature Guide 1 15 Optional Device Features b Intercept Routing Intercept Routing Busy DND will work and the call will be redirected to the preprogrammed destination C Outgoing Message OGM An outgoing message OGM will be sent to the caller The message for busy DND mode can be assigned for each outgoing message OGM which has a DISA floating extension number DISA Intercept Routing No Answer If a destination is not available to answer a DISA call within a preprogrammed time period DISA Intercept time gt DISA Intercept Time 211 after the call is reached the call will be redirected to the programmed destination by the Intercept feature gt Trunk Group Intercept Destination 470 or Extension Intercept Destination 604 If the intercept destination is not available to answer the call within a preprogrammed time period DISA Disconnect Time after Intercept after the DISA Intercept time expires the call will be disconnected SMDR The call information for DISA is recorded as the one of the DISA floating extension numbers gt 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Programming Example The following items can be assigned to each outgoing message OGM Outgoing Floating Automated Attendant No Busy DND Message ops not 2 3 4 3 6 7 o Moen
276. nual References User Manual 1 11 1 Using the Call Log 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 162 Feature Guide 1 17 Message Features 1 17 Message Features 1 17 1 Message Waiting Description An extension user can notify another extension user that he wishes to talk to the user The notified extension user can return the call or listen to the messages left in his mailbox of the VPS When a message is left on a PT the Message button on it lights or the Message Ringer Lamp on it turns on red Pressing the lit Message button while on hook shows the caller s information as shown below Example Extension no and name of who left the message Message buttons gt Own extension TT Incoming call distribution group CL Other extension II C3 NZ N NI For example this button is useful when the secretary checks the message for the boss Boss amp Secretary Feature Conditions Message Button A flexible button can be customised as the Message button for the extension other extensions or an incoming call distribution group Distinctive Dial Tone for Message Waiting If the Distinctive Dial mode is enabled dal tone 4 will be sent to an extension when a message has been left on the extension 1 26 1 Dial Tone SLT with a Message Waiting Lamp KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only The lamp activates in the same way as the MESSAGE button on a PT if an MSLC card is connected to the PBX The Message Waiting
277. nversation with the other party Conditions e While having a conversation with one party the other party is in Consultation Hold Consultation Hold Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting User Manual References User Manual 1 4 3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately Call Splitting Feature Guide 133 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 4 Music on Hold Description Music can be played to any party on hold The following music sources are available a Internal music source b External music source C Cyclic tone KX TDA100 KX TDA200 BGM number 1 or 2 or cyclic tone can be selected for the Music on Hold Music on Hold 711 BGM numbers are the same as the external music port numbers e g External music port 1 is BGM1 However BGM2 includes internal music sources 1 and 2 as well as external music port 2 It is possible to choose what music source will be used as BGM2 Music Source Selection for BGM with the KX TDA30 BGM2 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 710 BGM Number and the Music Source Music Source 1 External music port 1 2 External music port 2 Internal music source 1 or 2 KX TDA30 BGM or cyclic tone can be selected for the Music on Hold Music on Hold 711 BGM includes internal music sources 1 2 and external music port It is possible to choose what music source will be used as BGM Music Source Selection
278. ocation for maintenance purposes Feature Guide 297 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 4 Automatic Setup Description There are two automatic setup features as follows 1 Automatic ISDN Configuration 2 Automatic Time Adjustment 1 Automatic ISDN Configuration The ISDN BRI port configuration can be set automatically through system programming The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN BRI port a L1 Active Mode b L2 Data Link Mode c Access Mode Point to Point Point to Multipoint d TEI Assignment Mode Fix 00 63 Automatic 2 Automatic Time Adjustment It is possible to adjust the PBX clock automatically in the following two ways a Summer Time Daylight Saving Time Setting The start and end dates of the summer time can be programmed The PBX clock will be adjusted one hour forward or backward at 2 00AM of the programmed date if enabled through system programming It means 2 00 AM will become 3 00 AM on the start date of the summer time and 2 00 AM will become 1 00 AM on the end date Note If the Timed Reminder Wake up call is set On the summer time start date the setting between 2 00 AM and 3 00 AM will not happen On the summer time end date the setting between 1 00 AM and 2 00 AM will ring twice b Time Information from Telephone Company Time information can be received on the following calls e Anincoming or outgoing
279. ode will be used Conditions WARNING The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA e The Dialled Number on the SMDR It is possible to choose to print either the user dialled number or the modified number on the SMDR through system programming 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e ARS Data Download Upload It is possible to download or upload the following ARS data to the PBX using PC programming 9 ARS Leading Number Table 2 ARS Routing Plan Table This is useful when a carrier has changed the call charge and the updated data can be used for multiple customers e A TRS Barring check is done before ARS is applied 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Feature Guide 115 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 1 Hands free Operation Description A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset Pressing specific buttons ed REDIAL automatically activate hands free mode Conditions e PTs with the MONITOR Button PT
280. ommended not to enable CPC signal detection on outgoing trunk calls e If CPC signal is detected during a Conference call gt 1 13 1 2 Conference the line is disconnected The remaining parties stay connected e f CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA and an extension or an outside party the line is disconnected Feature Guide 127 1 11 Transferring Features 1 11 Transferring Features 1 11 1 Call Transfer 128 Description An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or an outside party The following features are available Feature Transferring method With Transfer is completed after announcing the destination Announcement party Without Transfer is completed without an announcement After dialling the destination while hearing a ringback EREECHEN tone the originator can replace the handset Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer Screened Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer Unscreened Conditions e f Music on Hold is enabled music can be sent to the held party while the call is transferred 1 12 4 Music on Hold It is programmable whether a ringback tone or music is sent Music for Transfer 712 e fthe transfer destination extension has set FWD to an outside party the call will be transferred to the outside party
281. on Number g e e o 4 1 1 Capacity of System Resources DTMF Group 2groups x24ch 2groups x32ch 2groups x 32ch EE 8 x 16 characters 8 x 16 characters 8 x 16 characters ml mm Extension Personal Identification Number 10 digits extn 10 digits extn 10 digits extn PIN Conference 3x10 8 x4 3 x10 8 x4 3 x10 8 x4 Verified Code 4 digits 1 000 entries 4 digits 1 000 entries 4 digits 1 000 entries Verified Code Personal Identification Number PIN 10 digits 1 000 10 digits 1 000 10 digits 1 000 entries entries entries 364 Feature Guide 4 1 Capacity of System Resources Category ltem KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 System Special Carrier Code 16 digits 20 entries 16 digits 20 entries 16 digits 20 entries Host PBX Access 10 digits 10 digits 10 digits Code 10 entries trunk 10 entries trunk 10 entries trunk group group group entries entries entries SMDR 200 200calls 200 200cals System Speed Dialling 32 digits 1 000 32 digits 1 000 32 digits 1 000 entries entries entries Personal Speed 32 digits 32 digits 32 digits Dialling 10 entries extn 10 entries extn 10 entries extn One touch Dialling 32 digits 32 digits 32 digits Hotline 0 Line 32digts 32digts 32digts 32digts 32digits 32digits Pad Protocol Dial ISDN Service 32 digits 32 digits 32 digits E 32 digits 32 digits 32 digits Leading Number Table 16 digits 1 000 16 digit
282. ossible to use default Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 shown in the following table a Extension Numbers Extension Numbering Scheme 1 through 32 Up to four digit number up to two digit leading number consisting of O through 9 additional digits up to two digits default two digits Example If the number 3 as a leading number for the 1st extension numbering scheme and the 2 as an additional digit have been programmed the extension number 300 through 399 are available b Feature Numbers Up to four digit number consisting of 0 through 9 X and c Other PBX Extension Numbers Other PBX Extension Number TIE 1 through 16 Up to three digit number consisting of O through 9 X and Flexible Numbering Table available while a dial tone is heard Pattern 1 with Pattern 2 without X Extension Numbering Scheme 1 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 2 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 3 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 4 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 5 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 6 Leading Number 300 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control Pattern 2 without X Pattern 1 with X Extension Numbering Scheme 7 32 Leading Number 9 0 Idle Line Access Local Access 0 9 9 0 0 9 Operator Call Trunk Group Access TIE Line Access Redial Speed Dialling System Personal xx Personal Speed Diall
283. ot make further trunk calls An extension assigned as the manager may increase the limit or clear the amount of the call charge Conditions e fthe limit is reached TRS Barring Level 7 is applied 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e Budget Management for Verified Call If an extension user make a trunk call with a verified code the call charge will be counted on the verified code not the extension gt 1 8 6 Verified Code Entry The limit of the call charge can be assigned on each verified code e The pay tone service or ISDN Advice of Charge AOC service is required for this feature e Itis possible to select whether to disconnect the line after an alarm tone or only to send an alarm tone when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit during a conversation User Manual References User Manual 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 105 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 3 Extension Lock 106 Description An extension user can change the TRS Barring level of the telephone 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring so that other users cannot make inappropriate trunk calls An extension personal identification number PIN is used to unlock the telephone 1 25 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout Conditions This feature also restricts changing th
284. oup is a group of PS extensions which receives incoming calls Each group has a floating extension number and name One PS can belong to multiple groups PS Ring PS Ring PS Ring Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Floating Extn No 301 302 Group Name Sales 1 Sales 2 Incoming Trunk Call Called Party s Name Callers Name Callers Name Information Display Number Number Number PS01 Programming Example EE PS03 PS04 PS05 PS06 PS07 Constituent PS Ring Group 1 PS Ring Group 2 Floating Extn No 301 Floating Extn No 302 Name Sales 1 Name Sales 2 PSO1 e f PS03 Get PS06 PS02 PS05 Conditions e PS Ring Group A maximum of 32 groups can be created e Available PS The KX TD7580 KX TD7590 KX TCA155 KX TCA255 KX TD7680 and KX TD7690 can join PS ring groups e Incoming trunk call information is shown on a PS display when a trunk call arrives at a PS ring group which the PS joins The display information can be selected on a PS ring group Feature Guide 217 1 23 Portable Station PS Features basis through system programming Called Party s Name Number or Callers Name Number e Calling Multiple PSs Simultaneously There are two methods to call multiple PSs simultaneously using the floating extension number assigned to the following groups Assign all desired All PS users in the The CS may often 1 2 2 PSs to one incoming group can use the be busy as each Incoming Distribution call
285. p 01 Paging Group 02 Paging Group 03 Paging Group 04 User Group 2 User Group 3 CE nr Extn 104 Extn 105 gt User Group 1 Extn 100 Extn 101 LL o Example Extn 104 can page the paging group 2 3 or 4 Any extension can page the pager 2 Feature Guide 139 1 14 Paging Features 140 Programming Example Paging Group User Group No External Pager No 2 No v Constituent 1 s User Groups of a Paging Group 640 External Pagers of a Paging Group 641 Explanation Paging Group No Explanation Extensions in user group 001 can page or be paged Extensions in user groups 002 and 003 can page or be paged Extensions in user group 003 can page or be paged They can also page through the external pager 1 All extensions all user groups can page through the external pager 2 All extensions all user groups can page or be paged All external pagers can also be paged Conditions Feature Guide Extensions which cannot be paged are PSs SLTs Ringing or busy PTs PTs in Paging Deny mode PTs in Paging DND mode These extensions cannot be paged but can answer the page External Pager Priority External pagers can be used with the following priorities TAFAS Paging BGM 1 15 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 1 15 4 Background Music BGM 1 14 Paging Features e Volume Control Pa
286. phone company after a conversation in on hook status to receive the call charge information Feature Guide References 1 8 6 Verified Code Entry 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 233 1 25 Extension Controlling Features 1 25 Extension Controlling Features 1 25 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 234 Description Each extension user can have his own PIN through system programming Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 005 or personal programming Extension PIN Personal Identification Number to set features or access his own telephone remotely The following features cannot be used without the PIN a Live Call Screening LCS 1 22 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration b Incoming and Outgoing Call Log Display Lock 1 16 2 Incoming Call Log Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System c Walking Extension 1 25 3 Walking Extension d Extension Lock 1 8 3 Extension Lock e Remote Extension Control 1 25 5 Remote Extension Control by User and Walking COS 1 8 5 Walking COS f Remote Extension Control and Walking COS using DISA 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA If an extension user has assigned an extension PIN this feature cannot be used without the PIN Conditions WARNING When a third party discovers the personal ident
287. preprogrammed time period ringing stops and the call is cancelled Call Duration The call duration can be restricted by a system timer If the timer expires the call will be disconnected Door Open While engaged on a doorphone call the extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in 1 15 2 Door Open A doorphone number can be referenced for each doorphone port Doorphone Number Heference 729 KX TDA30 only Doorphones 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 cannot make a call simultaneously If a visitor presses the doorphone button while the other doorphone is engaged in a call he will hear no tone Doorphones 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 cannot receive a call simultaneously If an extension user calls a doorphone while the other doorphone is engaged in a call he will hear a busy tone Installation Manual References Installation Manual Feature Guide lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 6 1 OPB3 Card 2 6 2 DPH4 Card 2 6 3 DPH2 Card 1 15 Optional Device Features 2 10 1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers lt KX TDA30 gt 6 5 1 DPH4 Card 6 5 2 DPH2 Card 6 9 1 Connection of Doorphones and Door Openers User Manual References User Manual 1 9 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected Feature Guide 143 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 2 Door Open Description An extension user can unlock the door for a visitor using his telephone The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed to unlock th
288. re a conversation is established when accessing the following features by the feature numbers Call Park Retrieve Call Pickup Hold Retrieve Paging Answer TAFAS Tone 4 1 Sent when moving from a two party call to a three party call e g Executive Busy Override Conference Privacy Release Two way Record Tone 4 2 Sent when moving from a three party call to a two party call e g Executive Busy Override Conference Privacy Release Two way Record Tones Sent when a call is placed on hold including Consultation Hold Conditions e Confirmation Tone Patterns All confirmation tone patterns have a default 4 2 1 Tones Ring Tones e tis possible to eliminate each tone Feature Guide 241 1 27 Networking Features 1 27 Networking Features 1 27 1 TIE Line Service 242 Description A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations The TIE lines can be used to call through the PBX to reach another switching system PBX or telephone company By using TIE lines the PBX can support not only communications with the public network but with other company members in the private network where the PBX is included Interface The following interfaces can be used to establish a private network cam me T1 TIE E amp M Digital 64 kbps x 24 channels E1 E amp M Digital 64
289. re hearing an outgoing message OGM DISA Mute Time It is possible to set the Mute time until the outgoing message OGM plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling after the caller reaches the DISA line Trunk to Trunk Call Duration If a call between two outside parties is established the call duration can be restricted by a system timer 1 10 8 Trunk Call Limitation If the timer expires the line will be disconnected unless the originating caller retries by pressing X or extends the time by sending any DTMF signalling The caller can prolong the call duration within the preprogrammed time period DISA Trunk to Trunk Call Prolong Time 210 and preprogramming number of times Tone Detection The following three types of tone detection can be enabled for each trunk group to disconnect a trunk to trunk call via DISA Silence Detection DISA Silence Detection 475 Continuous Signal Detection DISA Continuous Signal Detection 476 Cyclic Signal Detection DISA Cyclic Signal Detection 477 Call Retry While hearing a ringback reorder or busy tone retrying the call is possible by pressing X During a trunk to trunk conversation the result of pressing X is programmable retry mode or DIMF mode DISA Reorder Tone Duration It is possible to set the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time Reorder tone will be sent to the caller for a preprogrammed time period When the timer expires the call
290. re is also Known as Hurry up Transfer e Hurry up Button A flexible button can be customised as the Hurry up button The number of calls queuing before Manual Queue Redirection may be performed is programmable Queuing Hurry up Level 629 The button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Calls in the Waiting Queue Off No queued call Red on At or under the assigned number for Hurry up Rapid red flashing Over the assigned number for Hurry up Feature Guide References 1 2 2 5 Overflow Feature 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 8 3 Forwarding a Waiting Call Manual Queue Redirection 48 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 4 VIP Call Description It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order Each incoming call distribution group can enable or disable the VIP Call mode When multiple groups enable the VIP Call mode the incoming call distribution group with the lowest numbered group has the highest priority When multiple groups disable the VIP Call mode queuing calls are distributed to extensions uniformly Example In the call centre incoming call distribution groups 1 and 3 enable the VIP Call mode while incoming call distribution groups 2 and 4 disable the VIP Cal
291. reases the number of messages that can be played simultaneously Example Up to 4 with the KX Up to 8 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or TDA100 KX TDA200 or 2 with the KX TDA30 4 with the KX TDA30 messages can be played messages can be played simultaneously to callers simultaneously to callers MSG MSG MSG Card Card Card PBX Total message recording time Total message recording time 8 minutes max 8 minutes max Feature Guide 147 1 15 Optional Device Features 148 Note When MSG card expansion has been completed the new MSG card is blank all necessary messages will need to be stored in the card This can be done in two ways a By installing the new MSG card then recording each message again The PBX will automatically store the new recordings in each MSG card b By transferring messages from the PBX to a personal computer PC using the Maintenance Console then transferring them back to the PBX with the new MSG card installed The same message can also be played simultaneously to multiple callers Recording Methods a Record voice messages through the extension telephone b Transfer prerecorded voice messages from external sound source into the PBX via an external music port Note Record voice messages only avoid the recording of music After recording messages a manager extension can also play them back for confirmation Progress tone is sent to a manager extension before recording messag
292. received through an ISDN line The network directly forwards the call to the destination which the extension user has set on the PBX as the forward destination of trunk calls the network is instructed by the PBX This feature is available only when the call is received through an ISDN port which supports this feature Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU Call Forwarding Busy CFB and Call Forwarding No Reply CFNR are applied to this feature This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service Example lt FWD gt lt Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P gt f P i CF Request Ko s to 01 23 4567 Outside Caller Dials 01 45 6789 v Extn 1011 DDI No 01 45 6789 Forward Destination of Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 i Outside Party Outside Caller Outside Party i 01 23 4567 01 23 4567 Dials 01 45 6789 Extn 1011 DDI No 01 45 6789 Forward Destination of Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 Conditions e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX e This feature is available when the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 186 Feature Guide 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Fea
293. remote programming An external modem can be connected to Not RMT card the Serial Interface RS 232C of the PBX Connect the modem to an extension port which is assigned as the DIL DID DDI MSN destination or to a trunk directly to connect to the PBX from the PC An AT command can be sent to the modem automatically when it is connected to the Serial Interface RS 232C port AT commands can be programmed beforehand through system programming to initialise the modem An AT command can also be sent manually in the PT system programming mode External Modem Control 801 Using an ISDN The floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance TA interface 64 must be assigned ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number kbps through 812 and dial the DIL DID DDI MSN number whose destination is an ISDN Trunk the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance The RMT card is not required for this method This method is available only when an user supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI is used Conditions e Access to system programming is allowed only one at a time e Programmer Code and Password for System Programming To access system programming a programmer code and its password must be entered There are three programmer codes which are set at the factory Each programmer code has a unique password which is also set at the factory Programmer codes can be changed using the Maintenance Console by selecting Pro
294. roup are busy additional incoming calls can wait in a queue While calls are waiting in the queue the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table which can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night 1 2 2 3 Queuing Feature Log in Log out Incoming call distribution group members can join Log in or leave Log out the groups manually While logged in a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call Wrap up 1 2 2 6 Log in Log out VIP Call It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order 1 2 2 4 VIP Call Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features Connecting a personal computer PC to this PBX via a DPT or via a Server PC on a LAN enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in the PC or in the Server PC 1 28 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Voice Mail Features This PBX supports Voice Processing Systems VPS with DTMF Integration as well as DPT Digital Integration 1 22 Voice Mail Features Feature Guide Portable Station PS Features PSs e g KX TD7590 KX TD7690 can be connected to this PBX It is possible to use the PBX features using the PS like a PT A PS can also be used
295. rs the call Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS If a call is transferred to an extension via the Automated Attendant AA service of the VPS and the call is not answered within a preprogrammed Transfer Recall time gt Transfer Recall Time 201 the PBX sends the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number The Transfer Recall to Mailbox setting should be enabled through system programming to use this feature Listening to a Recorded Message Direct Mailbox Access Ifthe VPS receives a message the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature e g turning on the Message button light on the corresponding telephone as notification gt 1 17 1 Message Waiting Thereby the VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox When the Message button light turns on pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox When the extension user dials an extension number of the VM DPT extension port or the floating extension number of the VM DPT group from his extension he can listen to the 1 22 Voice Mail Features messages stored in his mailbox without dialling his mailbox number Direct Mailbox Access It is possible to
296. rvice of the telephone company e g Call Transfer This is used by putting the current ISDN call on hold by sending a flash recall signal This feature is enabled or disabled for each ISDN port 4 Private Networking Connection QSIG Private networking with QSIG is possible using an ISDN line The QSIG mode Master or Slave can be enabled on an ISDN port basis 5 ISDN Extension 1 19 1 10 ISDN Extension An ISDN BRI PHI port can be used for extension connection While the extension connection is enabled ISDN terminal devices e g ISDN telephone G4 fax machine personal computer or a behind PBX can be connected to the port When the ISDN port is in P P configuration one ISDN terminal device can be connected to the port When the ISDN port is in P MP configuration a maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to the port However only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously Conditions e Overlap En bloc ISDN call dialling mode Overlap or En bloc can be selected for each ISDN port When Overlap is selected the PBX sends each dialled digit individually When En bloc is selected the PBX sends all of dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling The PBX recognises end of dialling as follows Dialling if programmed Dialling a preprogrammed telephone number Inter digit timer expires Feature Guide 179 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Ser
297. s the whole number the whole number carried out on the following digits e ARS If ARS is applied to a dialled number TRS Barring will check the user dialled number not the modified number by ARS In this case a Host PBX Access code and or a Special Carrier Access code will not be checked e Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation The dialling of digits can be restricted while engaged on a received trunk call If the number of dialled digits exceeds the preprogrammed limitation the line will be disconnected e A TRS Barring level can be changed by some features The priority of features when multiple features are used is as follows 1 Dial Tone Transfer 1 8 4 Dial Tone Transfer 2 Budget Management 1 8 2 Budget Management 3 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling Feature Guide 103 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 4 Walking COS Verified Code Entry gt 1 8 5 Walking COS 1 8 6 Verified Code Entry 5 Extension Lock Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 8 3 Extension Lock 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 2 4 Time Service 104 Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 2 Budget Management Description Limits the telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on an extension basis If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit an extension user cann
298. s 1 000 16 digits 1 000 entries entries entries Leading Number SC 16 digits 200 entries 16 digits 200 entries 16 digits 200 entries Exception Table Itemised Billing Code 10 digits 10 digits 10 digits Authorisation Code 10 digits 10 digits 10 digits TIE Line Routing and TRS Barring Denied 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits Code 100 entries level 100 entries level 100 entries level TRS Barring 16 digits 16 digits 16 digits Exception Code 100 entries level 100 entries level 100 entries level Feature Guide 365 4 1 Capacity of System Resources Category em KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 Call Log Outgoing Call Log 100 logs extn 100 logs extn 100 logs extn PT 5 x 28 logs PBX 5 x 128 logs PBX 5 x 128 logs PBX Outgoing Call Log 100 logs extn 100 logs extn 100 logs extn PS 5 x 28 logs PBX 5 x 128 logs PBX 5 x 128 logs PBX Incoming Call Log 100 logs extn 100 logs extn 100 logs extn PT 10 x 28 logs PBX 10 x 128 logs PBX 10 x 128 logs PBX Incoming Call Log 100 logs extn 100 logs extn 100 logs extn PS 10 x 28 logs PBX 10 x 128 logs PBX 10 x 128 logs PBX Incoming Call Log Incoming Call ee 100 logs group 100 logs group Distribution Group 10 x 64 logs PBX 10 x 64 logs PBX 10 x 64 logs PBX System Password for Password System Password for 4 10 characters 4 10 characters 4 10 characters Installer System Password for User for PC 4 10 characters 4 10
299. s Idle Line Access no Phone no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code GC Ce Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code w Available Feature Guide 31 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block Description Internal calls can be restricted on a COS basis Each COS of the caller can enable or disable this feature for each COS of the called party Programming Example Called Party calles Party cs ese 3 Explanation a COS 1 can make calls to all extensions b COS 2 can make calls to COS 1 only COS 2 cannot make calls to COS 2 c COS 3 can make calls to COS 3 only r gt lt lt i COS 2 COS 3 i Ce E oa I Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 105 Extn 106 DI sgsgsg EE ER EE Uu Conditions e Restricted extension numbers cannot be the parameter of the feature settings eg Walking Extension e All extensions can make an Operator Call 2 2 5 Operator Features regardless of the Internal Call Block 32 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features e This feature can also restrict calling a doorphone from an extension on a COS of the extension and a COS of the doorphone port basis Each doorphone port can be assigned a COS 1 15 1 Doorphone Call Feature Guide 33 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 Incoming Call
300. s assigned to receive Caller ID A display PT user can see the information The PBX can modify the received number according to preprogrammed tables so that he can call back or memorise it For example if the area code is sent and it is not required to return the call store the area code in the table so that the area code is deleted automatically Caller ID to SLT Port KX TDA30 only An SLT user can also see the caller s information This feature is available only for SLTs compatible with FSK type Caller ID Note This feature complies with ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute type FSK and Bellcore type FSK Features Caller ID includes the following features Remus Gem Gemen 1 Feature Guide Caller ID Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Automatic Number Identification ANI KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only Caller s information which is sent from an analogue trunk The following Caller ID signalling types are supported FSK and DTMF Caller s information which is sent from e 1 19 1 2 an ISDN line Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Caller s information which is sent from e 1 20 1 E1 Line an E1 or T1 line Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only e 1 21 1 T1 Line Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 1 16 Caller ID Features 2 Service Features Features Senn Deas Calling Line Directs a DIL DID DDI MSN call to a CLI e 1 1 1
301. s can make a call by selecting stored names on the display Personal Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling Display Lock An extension user can lock the Personal Speed Dialling number display to prevent other users from viewing the number In this case the Incoming and Outgoing Call Log information displays are also locked An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature gt 1 25 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN System Speed Dialling TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling It is possible to override the TRS Barring using the System Speed Dialling TRS Barring Level for System Speed Dialling 509 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring System Speed Dialling Display by AUTO DIAL STORE Button KX TDA30 only Pressing the AUTO DIAL STORE button on a display DPT while on hook can display the System Speed Dialling Directory User Manual References User Manual 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 1 11 1 Using the Call Log 1 11 2 Using the Directories 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 3 3 Customising Your System System Programming Feature Guide 89 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling Description An extension user can access a person or feature easily This is enabled by storing the number e g extension number telephone number or feature number for Quick Dialling Conditions e Quick Dialling is convenient in the
302. s used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or printer e Stop Bit Length A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals lt KX TDA30 gt 6 10 1 Connection of Peripherals Feature Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 2 2 6 Log in Log out 1 11 1 Call Transfer 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 27 1 TIE Line Service 230 Feature Guide 1 24 Administrative Information Output Features 1 24 2 Charge Meter Description The PBX receives a call charge signal during or after a conversation with an outside party The call charge information is shown on the telephone display and the SMDR 1 Call Charge Signal Service Call charge signal service from the telephone company depends on the trunk being used Analogue trunk Pay Tone KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only Advice of Charge AOC 1 19 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC Meter Pulse KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only When the pay tone service is used pay tone type 12 kHz 16 kHz should be selected Pay Tone Signal Type 491 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only
303. s with the MONITOR button can only dial in hands free mode and cannot be used for hands free conversations 116 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 2 Off hook Monitor Description A PT user can let others listen to the user s conversation through the built in speaker during a conversation using the handset Conditions e Capable Telephone KX T7400 series and KX T7500 series display PT only and all KX T7600 series telephones To enable this feature system programming is required If disabled hands free conversation is performed instead User Manual References User Manual 1 4 7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation Off hook Monitor Feature Guide 117 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 3 Mute Description During a conversation a PT user can disable the speaker microphone or the handset microphone to consult privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the built in soeaker or the handset receiver The user can hear the other party s voice during Mute Only your voice will be muted Conditions e This feature is available with all PTs that have the AUTO ANS MUTE button User Manual References User Manual 1 4 6 Mute 118 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 4 Headset Operation Description This PBX provides headset compatible PTs A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset For connection and operation ref
304. scriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 26 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming trunk calls There are two types of Intercept Routing as follows Feature Description Intercept Routing No If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed Answer IRNA time period Intercept time Intercept Time 203 it is redirected to the preprogrammed destination Intercept Routing If a called party is busy or in DND mode the call is redirected to Busy DND the preprogrammed destination The available intercept destination is as follows Type 1 The destination assigned on the extension port which the original destination joins Extension Intercept Destination 604 Type 2 The destination assigned on the trunk group which receives the call Trunk Group Intercept Destination 470 Original Destination The Available Intercept Destination Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Type 1 Extension T1 OPX Type 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works 1 2 2 5 Overflow Feature The overflow destination is assigned on the incoming call distribution group which the original destination joins Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 625 External Pager TAFAS Type 2 DISA Type 2 Analogue ISDN
305. se Time 416 339 LCOT Pulse Rate 411 9337 354 329 315 338 338 338 LCOT Reverse Circuit 415 339 LCOT BRI Trunk Connection 400 336 LCOT BRI Trunk Group Number 402 336 LCOT BRI Trunk Name 401 336 LCOT BRI Trunk Number Reference 409 337 LCS gt Live Call Screening LCS 212 LED Indication 173 Line Preference Override 81 Line Preference Incoming 65 Line Preference Outgoing 81 List of Abbreviations 369 Live Call Screening LCS 212 Local Alarm Information 310 Log in Log out 52 Log in Log out Monitor 53 Main Processing MPR Software Version Reference 190 330 Making Call Features 68 Malicious Call Identification MCID 190 Manager Assignment 511 347 Manager Features 290 Manager Password 112 329 Manual Queue Redirection 48 Maximum Number of Agents 632 352 MCID gt Malicious Call Identification MCID 190 Memory Dialling Features 84 Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY 84 Message Features 163 Message Waiting 163 Modem Floating Extension Number 811 361 MSN gt Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 22 Multiple FWD 61 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 22 Music for Transfer 712 357 Music on Hold 134 Music on Hold 711 357 Music Source Selection for BGM with the KX TDA30 BGM2 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 710 357 Mute 118 N Networking Features 4 242 No Line Preference 65 81 O Off hook Ca
306. sfer Hold Call Waiting etc A flash recall signal is sent to the host PBX or the telephone company This is only available on trunk calls including Host PBX Access gt 1 5 4 7 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Conditions Flash Recall Time The Flash Recall time can be assigned for each trunk port gt LCOT Flash Recall Time 417 EFA Button A flexible button can be customised as the EFA button Pressing the FLASH RECALL button which is set to EFA mode 1 10 6 Flash Recall Terminate or the EFA button performs this feature It is also possible to perform this feature by entering the feature number when the current call is placed on a Consultation Hold Consultation Hold Allows an extension user to place a call on hold temporarily to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual Feature Guide 1 9 2 If a Host PBX is Connected 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 8 Trunk Call Limitation Description Trunk calls are limited by the following features Feswe Geseis Extension to Trunk Call If a call between an extension user and an outside party is Duration established the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group Extension to Trunk Call Duration 472 Both parties will hear an alarm tone 15 seconds before the t
307. sonal Identification Number PIN 122 or through manager programming e Verified Code PIN Lock If the wrong PIN is entered incorrectly three times the line will be disconnected If the incorrect PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively the PIN against the verified code will be locked Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the PIN will be unlocked and cleared Feature Guide 109 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features e Budget Management for Verified Calls A limit of the call charge can be assigned on each verified code Example of Verified Codes and Their Programming Location Verified User Verified COS Fe Budget Billing Code No Name Code PIN No for ARS Management _ 1 s Verified Code 120 2 s Verified Code Name 121 2 Verified Code COS Number 123 Feature Guide References 1 8 2 Budget Management 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 2 2 6 Manager Features User Manual References User Manual 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions 3 2 2 Manager Programming 110 Feature Guide 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Description ARS automatically selects the carrier available at the time an outgoing trunk call is made according to preprogramm
308. speaker handset and headset volume and the display contrast Navigator Key and Jog Dial can also be used to select data from the Call Directory and the System Feature Access Menu on the display Navigator Key Jog Dial Volume Key ENTER Used to confirm the selected item CANCEL Used to cancel the selected item PROGRAM PROG Used to enter and exit the programming mode Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up Flash Recall mode or Terminate mode FLASH or used to send a flash recall signal to the telephone RECALL company or host PBX to access their features External Feature Access mode With the KX TDA30 also used as a CANCEL button while on hook Feature Guide 167 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Used for hands free operation Also used to switch between SP PHONE handset and hands free operation Speakerphone MONITOR Used for a hands free dialling Also used to monitor the party s voice in hands free mode Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication REDIAL o Used to redial the last dialled number TRANSFER Used to transfer a call to another party Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to Flexible CO Trunk a different Trunk Access button Default S CO or to another feature button INTERCOM Used to make or receive intercom calls AUTO ANS Used to receive an incoming
309. sper OHCA gt 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA TRS Call Barring 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Extension Lock 1 8 3 Extension Lock Walking COS 1 8 5 Walking COS Trunk Call Limitation 1 10 8 Trunk Call Limitation Call Transfer 1 11 1 Call Transfer Door Open 1 15 2 Door Open DISA 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 1 19 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 1 23 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode SMDR for Outgoing Trunk Call 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Time Service Switching 2 2 4 Time Service Manager Features 2 2 6 Manager Features PT Programming 2 3 2 PT Programming e Walking COS Extension users can make a call from other extensions of the lower level COS by using their own higher level COS temporarily User Manual References User Manual 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions 278 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 2 Group Description This PBX supports various types of groups 1 Trunk Group Trunks can be grouped into a specified number of trunk groups e g for each carrier trunk type etc C LCOT BHI Trunk Group Number 402 Several settings can be assigned on a trunk group basis All trunks belonging to a trunk group follow the assignment determined for that trunk group One trunk can belong to only one trunk
310. stallation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals lt KX TDA30 gt 6 10 1 Connection of Peripherals User Manual References User Manual 1 3 4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Feature Guide 145 1 15 Optional Device Features 1 15 4 Background Music BGM 146 Description A PT user can listen to BGM through the built in speaker while on hook and idle BGM External BGM can also be broadcast in the office through the external pagers this can be turned on and off by an extension assigned as the manager Conditions BGM e Hardware requirement A user supplied external music source such as a radio e The music through the PT is interrupted when going off hook e KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only Each user can set cancel BGM and also select the music source e KX TDA30 only Each user can only set cancel BGM the user cannot make a music selection BGM External e Hardware requirement A user supplied external pager e External pagers can be used with the following priorities TAFAS Paging BGM gt 1 14 1 Paging 1 15 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals lt KX TDA30 gt 6 10 1 Connection of Peripherals User Manual References User Manual 1 7 8 Turning on the Background Music BGM 2 1 4 Turning on the Exter
311. t 01 64 Max 8 digits END en including decimal point ENTER Feature Guide 327 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 3 System Programming Flexible Numbering 100 100 gt 89 LocationNo esch G EZ END ENTER ss S ENTER HOLD To the Next Location No To the Desired Location No v NEXT CANCEL Time Service Switching Mode 101 101 gt gt sar gt r AUTO ANS MESSAGE END ENTER Manual Automatic ENTER Time Service Starting Time 102 In 12 hour Format 102 gt gt Bam meno 0 Sun 1 Mon 1 Day 1 2 Lunch ENTER 2 Tue 3 Wed 3 Day 2 4 Night 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat Hour Minute gt gt Enn gt 6 gt C 01 00 12 59 AM PM ENTER To the Next Time No To the Next Day No NTER p v NEXT Page up In 24 hour Format 102 gt gt gt Day No rime No ICH gt E 0 Sun 1 Mon 1 Day 1 2 Lunch 00 00 23 59 END ENTER 2 Tuel3 Wed 3 Day 2 4 Night ER 4 Thu 5 Fri 6 Sat To the Next Time No To the Next Day No NTER gt v NEXT Page up 328 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Idle Line Access Local Access 103 103 r gt Location No gt Trunk Group No gt r E END ENTER Ore Se ENTER System Password for Administrator for PT Programming 110 110 gt Q gt Password gt r 4 10 digits END ENTER 1234 ENTER System Password for User for PT Programming 111
312. t Ready Mode on off Log in Log out Incoming Call Queue Monitor Hot Line programme set cancel Absent Message set cancel BGM set cancel 302 Feature Guide Pattern 2 without Pattern 1 with X 60 62 7 X0 7 0 7 7X1 7 2 7 2 7 X3 7 3 7 5 7 5 70 70 710 710 71 1 711 712 712 713 713 714 714 715 715 716 716 720 720 721 721 727 727 x730 730 x 731 731 x732 732 x733 733 X735 735 x736 736 x739 739 x740 740 750 750 751 751 2 3 System Data Control Pattern 1 with X Pattern 2 without X Timed Reminder set cancel 760 Extension Lock set cancel 77 7 Time Service Switch Remote Extension Lock off Remote Extension Lock on Extension Feature Clear Extension Personal Identification Number PIN set cancel Dial Information CTI Other PBX Extension Number TIE 1 16 1 For users in Germany France Belgium Norway Sweden Denmark Finland Portugal Italy and New Zealand 2 For users in the United Kingdom 3 For users in other countries areas 4 For users in New Zealand the default value of Idle Line Access Local Access is 1 2 Flexible Numbering available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard Feature numbers which are available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard can be customised for easy use The numbers should be one digit O through 9 X or and must not conflict For default refer to the following table Flexib
313. t can use this feature Group Call Pickup e A specified number of call pickup groups can be created User Groups of a Pickup Group 650 each of which consists of user groups One user group can belong to several call pickup groups 2 2 2 Group Example Call Pickup Group 1 Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3 User Group 2 User Group 1 User Group 3 User Group 4 el d EE et ee e ze e lt pen rg re e e ll e et lt et lt lt Se Se i d User Manual References User Manual 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup 66 Feature Guide 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback Description A PT user with a speakerphone can talk to a caller without lifting the handset If the user receives a call in Hands free Answerback mode a hands free conversation is established in the following method Intercom Call Established immediately after a beep tone at the called extension and the caller hears a confirmation tone Trunk Call Established after a specified number of rings a called extension Ka hears a beep tone Including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold Conditions Hands free Answerback applies to Intercom calls and trunk calls including calls directed to an incoming call distribution group in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution
314. table Station PS 70 86 0 215 FP PANO COU RE 217 eal E 220 Po FAE BIN ee 221 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 222 Administrative Information Output Features 225 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 225 EEE 231 Extension Controlling Features 234 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 234 Extension Feature Clear 236 Feature Guide 1 25 3 Walking Gen EE 237 1 25 4 TimedReminder 238 1 25 5 Remote Extension Control by 86 239 1 26 Audible Tone Eesen geed 240 PASSEN UNIES 240 1262 Qohlirinauofi TONE avsender 241 1 27 INGT WORKING c 242
315. the corresponding PBX PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX 3 eege eege 9 The Sent rom PBA2 3011 is an extension number of PBX 3 The call is received at extension 3011 When a TIE line call is sent to a PBX from another PBX first the PBX modifies the number sent to the PBX according to the assignment for each trunk port of the PBX the removed number of digits from and or added number to the number sent to the PBX is determined by the assignment Then the PBX starts to check the number whether the number is an extension number of the PBX Feature Guide 247 1 27 Networking Features b PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code Example TIE Line Network E ET ee ee ER EE ETE e ey a RE ETE ER eee es TER EDER ee REE e M EEE PBX Code 954 le 953 1011 1 953 1011 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 A TIE line call is sent to PBX 2 from PBX 1 If the number sent from PBX 1 has the PBX code of PBX 2 952 the call will be received at the corresponding extension of PBX 2 e g 10110f PBX 2 If not PBX 2 checks the number in the TIE Line Routing and Modified Table of PBX 2 If the match is found in the table the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX PBX 3 The number sent from PBX 2 953 1011 has the PBX code of PBX 3 953 The call is received at extension 1011 of PBX 3 SEE s PBX 1 PBX 2 Dials 7 953 1
316. the personal identification number PIN verified code PIN extension PIN of the PBX there will be a risk that they will make fraudulent phone calls using the telephone line and the cost will be charged to your own account In order to avoid this problem we strongly recommend the following points a Carefully maintain the secrecy of the PIN b Specify a complicated PIN as long and random as you can make it c Change the PIN frequently Operator Assignment 006 006 gt e gt gt gt e CI 1 Day 2 Lunch 1 4 digits END ENTER 3 Break 4 Night ENTER Console Paired Telephone 007 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 007 gt G gt ConsoleNo gt Exn No gt r ENTER 01 08 1 4 digits ETE END KX TDA30 007 gt Q gt Console No gt gt EZ ENTER 01 04 1 4 digits ENTER END Note This programme is available after the port connected to the Console is assigned as Console in Terminal Device Assignment 601 326 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Absent Message 008 008 gt LocationNo Message gt gt Ga s END ENTER 1 8 Max 16 characters ENTER Charge Margin 010 010 gt 6 Em amp gt 2 2 decimal places END ENTER ENTER Charge Tax 011 011 gt gt e i END ENTER 01 03 2 2 decimal places ENTER Charge Rate per Unit 012 012 gt 8 gt Trunk Group Seel g
317. the preprogrammed emergency 1 5 4 2 Emergency numbers regardless of the restrictions imposed Call on the extension A user can enter an account code to identify 1 5 4 3 Account Code outgoing calls for accounting and billing Entry purposes A user can temporarily convert the Pulse mode e 1 5 4 4 Dial Type to DIMF mode to access special services Selection A user can insert a preprogrammed Pause time 1 5 4 6 Pause into a dialling number by pressing the PAUSE Insertion button or it is automatically inserted between e 1 5 4 7 Host PBX the user dialled code e g Host PBX Access Access Code Access code or Special Carrier Access code and the Code to the Telephone following digits Company from a Host PBX e 1 5 4 8 Special Carrier Access Code Feature Guide 71 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 Emergency Call Description An extension user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers gt Emergency Number 304 after seizing a trunk regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension Conditions e A specified number of emergency numbers can be stored some may have default values e Emergency numbers may be called even when in Account Code Forced mode 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry in any TRS Barring levels 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRSJ Call Barring Barring after the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached 1 8 2 Budget Management in Extension Lock
318. tion extension is busy or in DND mode Incoming Call Distribution Group Overflow TTT BETEN mu lt DE X ep ep LJ ep ep H ep Le A a eh kd h k eh sr eh L destination In the above illustration forwarding stops at the extension E However forwarding can go farther in the following cases f a destination extension rings and then the call is redirected to the forward destination by the FWD No Answer or Busy No Answer feature fa destination extension rings and then the call is redirected to the intercept destination by the Intercept Routing No Answer feature Ifa call waits in a queue of an incoming call distribution group and then the call is redirected to the overflow destination by the Queuing Time Table 1 2 2 3 Queuing Feature In the above cases the forwarding counters reset to zero and calls can be forwarded up to four times again from the applicable extension that occurred in the case above i53 V ZI ZZ a P mL Ll FWD No Answer Boss amp Secretary feature It is possible to call the original extension from the destination extension regardless of the forward setting RD Incoming y call CU Nt SE Call or i transfer a call Boss Secretary Original FWD destination Feature Guide 61 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 62 e Message Waiting While calls are forwarded Message Waiting i
319. to PBX 2 through the trunk group TRG 2 TIE line 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 01 23 4567 1 27 Networking Features lt PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code gt Telephone Company TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 952 9 01 23 4567 l 1 E E Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 1011 01 23 4567 Dials 7 952 9 01 23 4567 or 802 952 9 01 23 4567 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 or dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX 1 8 trunk group number 02 TRG2 PBX code 952 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 The call is connected to the outside party 01 23 4567 through PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 Feature Guide 251 1 27 Networking Features b Trunk Call through Other PBXs by the ARS feature Example lt Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code gt Telephone Company TIE Line Network wem e mm pm pm em pm um ee em mm JE Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 2011 01 23 4567 Dials 9 01 23 4567 Aen em vm eee pm mn rm rm rm rm rm rm mm em rm mm mm em vm mm mm mm mm rm rm em rm rm rm mm rm em rm rm rm em em rm mm mm em rm rm mm mm mm eB mm m m x
320. ton A manager extension must store the desired TRS Barring level in the Toll Restriction Call Barring button A flexible button can be customised as the Toll Restriction Call Barring button Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 2 1 3 Restriction Level Control Dial Tone Transfer Feature Guide 107 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 5 Walking COS Description An extension user can use another extension telephone with the COS assigned on his own extension temporarily The extension accesses his own extension from another telephone and operates features with the same conditions which are assigned his own extension It is one of the remote operations An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature 1 25 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Conditions e The following items are applied COS programming Budget Management 1 8 2 Budget Management Itemised Billing code for ARS 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Extension number recorded on the SMDR 1 24 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e Walking COS through DISA This feature is also available through the DISA 1 15 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References User Manual 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions 108 Featur
321. trunk group or BRI line features XX COS Programming Class of Service parameters GXX Extension Programming Assignment of the extension features Resource Interface Programming SMDR amp Maintenance Programming Assignment of the various interfaces on SES the PBX Setting of SMDR and maintenance Kee features Card Programming The programming used to refer to or delete Ee the card Feature Guide 321 3 3 PT Programming Entering Characters To store a name or message you can enter the following characters Those tables show you the characters available on each button Table 1 Standard mode 12 13 14 15 322 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Table 2 Option mode for GR model Buttons 1 ER C3 J 4 5 6 ER 0 ED JAEHHBHBHHRHBHH D lt D RK o gt Ur Feature Guide 323 3 3 PT Programming Example of Entering Characters To enter Ann NTER gt OR 6 5 times lt e FWD DND e To erase the character on the cursor press CLEAR e To move the cursor to the left press a e o move the cursor to the right press gt e If SELECT is pressed the characters for each button will bring out in reverse order e To toggle between Table 1 and Table 2 when using KX 1 7600 series press the leftmost soft button 324 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 2 Basic Programming Date amp Time 000 In 12
322. ts ENTER END KX TDA30 720 gt gt TmeNo gt SlotNo gt NM M 1 Day 2 Lunch 08 09 ES 3 Break 4 Night gt gt Destination No gt G r Max 32 digits ENTER END Doorphone Number Reference 729 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 729 gt e gt Slot No gt Ge gt Doorphone No gt TT END ENTER EEN Reference only KX TDA30 729 gt gt Slot No gt Port No Doorphone Nol gt L ENTER 08 09 Reference only END Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 730 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 730 gt e Message No gt Extn No gt er ENTER 01 64 1 4 digits ENTER END KX TDA30 730 gt 89 gt Message No gt Enno gt G gt C3 ENTER 01 32 1 4 digits ENTE END 358 Feature Guide 3 3 PT Programming Outgoing Message OGM Name 731 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 731 gt gt gt ENTER 01 64 Max 20 characters ENTER END KX TDA30 731 gt Messages gt gt gt ENTER 01 32 Max 20 characters ENTER END DISA Security Mode 732 732 gt Qe gt S rer hh None END ENTER Trunk All ENTER Feature Guide 359 3 3 PT Programming 3 3 10 SMDR amp Maintenance Programming RS 232C Parameter New Line Code 800 800 gt amp Location gt X or o gt C AUTO ANS MESSAGE END ENTER CR LF CR ENTER HOLD RS 232C Parameter Baud Rate 800 800 gt e gt
323. tton can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button e The CLIP COLP number must match the telephone number provided by the telephone company Otherwise it will be ignored or replaced by another number e When using a private network the extension number assigned for each extension through system programming Extension Number 003 is sent for CLIP COLP 1 27 8 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 7 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Callers Telephone Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 7 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Callers Telephone Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR 1 7 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Feature Guide 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC Description The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company There are the following types Advice of Charge During Call ACC is received during the call and when the call is AOC D completed Advice of Charge AOC is received when the call is completed At End of Call AOC E
324. ture According to the DID Programming Example and VPS Programming Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment a caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS Feature Guide 211 1 22 Voice Mail Features 212 10 11 12 Feature Guide Time mode day lunch break night of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DID destination and company greeting number Trunk Call Trunk Call 123 4567 123 2468 Sends the following information VPS Trunk Group 1 Time mode Day PBX Intercept Sends the following information VPS Trunk Group 2 Time mode Night Tenant 3 Company B EE Extn 102 Tenant 1 Company A VE VPS Floating Extn No 100 mmm wmm JE 6 mm Caller s Identification Notification to the VPS When receiving a trunk call the PBX sends the caller s identification number name to the VPS Status Notification to the VPS After the call is redirected by the VPS the PBX sends the status of the redirected extension e g busy to the VPS Paging by the VPS The VPS can perform the Paging feature using the recorded message 1 14 1 Paging Live Call Screening LCS PT and PS users can monitor his own mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and if desired answer the call by pressing the LCS button When the caller is leaving a message in the mailbox monitoring can be carried out in t
325. ture for the extension Internal Both The feature is applied to trunk calls intercom calls or both Group FWD External Used to perform the FWD feature for a specified incoming call Internal Both distribution group The feature is applied to trunk calls intercom calls or both Account Code Entry Used to enter an account code Account Conference Used to establish a multiparty conversation Terminate Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up External Feature Access Used to send a flash recall signal to the telephone company EFA or host PBX to access their features Charge Reference Used to check the total call charge for your own extension Call Park Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset PBX parking zone Call Park Automatic Park Used to park a call in an idle PBX parking zone automatically Zone 170 Feature Guide 1 18 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Call Log Used to show the incoming call information Log in Log out Used to switch between the log in and log out mode Hurry up Used to redirect the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call distribution group to the overflow destination Wrapup Used to switch the Wrap up Not Ready and Ready modes System Alarm Used to confirm a PBX error Time Service Used to switch the assigned time modes day lunch break or night Also used to check the current time mode status Answer Used to answer
326. tures User Manual References User Manual 1 5 1 Forwarding Calls Feature Guide 187 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 1 6 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN Description An ISDN call can be put on hold using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature This can be a part of a Call Transfer CT by ISDN 1 19 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN This feature allows an ISDN call to be held and a call to be made to another outside party using only one communication channel of ISDN A PT user can easily use this feature by pressing the ISDN Hold button This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 141 Call Hold HOLD supplementary service Conditions e ISDN Hold Button A flexible button can be customised as the ISDN Hold button e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e The TRS Barring feature is applied when making a call after activating this feature gt 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e ARS cannot be applied to the call dialled after activating this feature 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS e It is impossible to seize any other trunk during this feature Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons 188 Feature Guide 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 1 7 Call
327. ty Example If a call is received in Lunch mode Received Destination Explanation Number 123 4567 Extn 100 The PBX finds the match in location 0001 in the table after receiving 7 So the call is routed to extension 100 123 456 Extn 101 The Inter digit time expired after receiving 6 The PBX finds the match in location 0003 in the table So the call is routed to extension 101 Feature Guide References 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 2 2 4 Time Service Feature Guide 21 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN BRI Basic Rate Interface line call with an MSN to a preprogrammed destination One ISDN BRI port can support a maximum of 10 MSNs Each MSN has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night Point to multipoint must be selected for the ISDN configuration gt BRI Configuration 426 Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Are any MSNs assigned in the MSN table The call is routed to the operator Intercept Routing No Destination Is the MSN found in the MSN table Yes The call is ignored Does the call have its CLI information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode No CLI works Is the CLI destination assigned Is the MSN destination for No the time mode assigned The call is routed to th
328. u Log in N e When the PS ring group is called using the floating extension number the group becomes busy to other callers using the floating extension number However the individual group members may be called directly using their extension number e Ifa PS ina PS ring group has set the DND feature for trunk calls the PS will not ring when an intercom call or a trunk call arrives at the PS ring group 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND e For calls directed to PS ring groups the PBX will handle at most two calls simultaneously The third call cannot arrive at a PS ring group until one of the first two calls is answered or a caller hangs up Feature Guide 219 1 23 Portable Station PS Features 1 23 3 PS Directory Description A PS user can store numbers and or names in the directory A stored number is dialled by selecting a name or number in the directory Depending on the PS model the PS user can use the following directories for easy operation PS Dialling Directory Makes a call by selecting from a private directory of names and telephone numbers System Speed Dialling Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of names System Speed Dialling Name 002 and numbers System Speed Dialling Number 001 PBX Extension Dialling Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of extension Directory names Extension Name 004 Shortcut Directory Accesses a feature by selecting from a priv
329. ual 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer Feature Guide 129 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 1 Call Hold Description An extension user can put a call on hold The following features are available depending on the resu It fetum peemge Call Hold General Any extension can retrieve a held call Exclusive Call Hold Only the extension user who held the call can retrieve it The result of the holding operation can be determined through system programming Pressing the HOLD button again just after the first time alternates the mode between General and Excl usive Call Hold Conditions 130 Feature Guide A PT user can hold an intercom call and multiple trunk calls simultaneously An SLT user can hold either an intercom call or a trunk call To hold multiple intercom calls on a PT simultaneously use the Call Park feature gt 1 12 2 Call Park Call Park feature can also be used to hold multiple intercom calls and or trunk calls simultaneously on an SLT Music on Hold Music if available is sent to the held party 1 12 4 Music on Hold Hold Recall If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Hold Recall Time 200 Hold Recall is heard at the extension which put the call on hold If the extension is engaged in a call the Hold Alarm will be heard If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved within a preprogra
330. ultiple groups Assignable Extensions PT SLT PS ISDN Extension T1 OPX PS Ring Group 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features Example Incoming Call Distribution Group 2 Floating Extn No 290 Name Sales 2 jE d Extn 105 Extn 106 Extn 107 Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 Floating Extn No 280 Name Sales 1 El ie Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 El ie Extn 103 Extn 104 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 5 VM Group There are two types of VM groups as follows VM DTMF Group A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration features One SLT port can belong to only one group VM DPT Group A group of DPT ports VM Group Floating Extension Number 660 which use the Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration features One DPT port can belong to only one group gt 1 22 1 Voice Mail VM Group Example VM DTMF Group VPS DTMF Integration PS ring group is a group of PS extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group Each group has a floating extension number and name through system programming One PS can belong to multiple groups gt 1 23 2 PS Ring Group VM DPT Group HE 6 PS Ring Group PS Ring Group 1 PS Ring Group 2 Floating Extn No 301 Floating Extn No 302 Name Sales 1 Name Sales 2 PS04 Feature Guide 281
331. umber of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code on a trunk group of this PBX basis A preprogrammed Pause time gt LCOT Pause Time 416 will be automatically inserted between the user dialled Host PBX Access code and the following digits gt 1 5 4 6 Pause Insertion Example Telephone Company Host PBX Access Code 0 Host PBX FE il Y Y Y Y j Outside Party 01 23 4567 Idle Line Access No 9 TRG1 Extn 101 Extn 102 Dials 0 01 23 4567 Host PBX Access Code Telephone No mmm E iT Dials 9 0 01 23 4567 Dials 9 101 Idle Line Idle Line Telephone No Pla VE Access No Host PBX Extn No Access Code of the Host PBX Note 0 should be assigned as a Host PBX Access code for trunk group TRG 1 of this PBX Feature Guide 77 1 5 Making Call Features Conditions e TRS Barring TRS Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e SMDR The dialled number including the Host PBX Access code can be recorded on the SMDR when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX e To record on the SMDR only long distance calls not local calls originated via the specific trunk group assign the long distance call code as a Host PBX Access code to the trunk group Fe
332. up 1 2 2 Paging Group User Groups of a Paging Group 640 Using the Paging feature extensions can page or answer a page within their groups One user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups gt 1 14 1 Paging Example Paging Group 3 User Group 1 User Group 2 i x T E Il B H SEE H SE l ES ES E Ee MES E Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 105 Pager 1 Pager 2 I l I I ppm REESE NE ESN EEE ENE ME EEE Idle Extension Hunting Group If a called extension is busy or in DND mode Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group which can be programmed through system programming Idle Extension Hunting Group Member 681 Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting Idle Extension Hunting Type 680 gt 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Incoming Call Distribution Group An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 620 Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 622 and name Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 623 One extension can belong to m
333. up can be assigned as a tenant operator The tenant operator may be the extension or incoming call distribution group of another tenant Example Extension 110 in tenant 1 is the tenant operator of tenant 3 Operator Call An extension user can call an operator with a simple operation When an operator call is made the call is routed to the tenant operator If no tenant operator exists the call will be routed to the PBX operator The time mode depends on the tenant of the calling extension If neither the tenant operator nor the PBX operator exists the caller will hear reorder tone Conditions e An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as both the tenant and PBX operator e A tenant operator can be assigned for multiple tenants Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service User Manual References User Manual 1 2 1 Basic Calling Feature Guide 289 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 6 Manager Features Description An extension assigned as the manager manager extension is allowed to use the specified features COS programming determines the extensions which can use the following manager features Manager Assignment 511 Manager eme Doscripton DOE Detailsin Manager Manager Changes the manager password Required Programm Password ing Change Sets sees clears and prints the call Required 1 24 2 charge data Charge Meter Verified Sets a verified co
334. uter Telephony Integration CTI Features 274 Conditions Application Programming Interface API Protocol The following interface is required for First Party Call Control and Third Party Call Control First Party Call ECMA CSTA Phase 3 Control Third Party Call ECMA CSTA Phase 3 Control e TAPI 2 1 The operating system of PC or Server PC required for First Party Call Control or Third Party Call Control depends on your CTI application software For details refer to the manual for your CTI application software One Server PC can be connected per PBX Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 3 1 MPR Card 2 6 6 CTI LINK Card 2 7 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals lt KX TDA30 gt 6 6 5 First Party Call Control CTI Connection 6 10 1 Connection of Peripherals Feature Guide Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features Feature Guide 275 2 1 System Configuration Hardware 2 2 1 1 276 1 System Configuration Hardware Extension Port Configuration Description There are three types of extension ports as follows a DPT Port With the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 DPT DSS Console or Panasonic VPS KX TVS TVP series DPT Digital Integration can be connected With the KX TDA30 DPT DSS Console KX TVS TVP series DPT Digital Integration or CS can be connected b SLT Port SLT or KX TVS
335. utside party b While a call is ringing at the PS c While the PS is in idle status PBX Fa cs CS E Interface d Calls will not be Ng disconnected CS Handover On the contrary Handover is not available in one of the following cases a When the new Handover CS is busy b When there is no CS within range C During a Conference call 1 13 1 Conference Features d While the Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 22 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration e While the PS user is paging other extensions 1 14 1 Paging f During a doorphone call 1 15 1 Doorphone Call g While the PS user is dialling digits to make a trunk call h During a conversation with an extension using PC Console or PC Phone to which the conversation is being recorded Feature Guide 215 1 23 Portable Station PS Features e When a caller has dialled the extension number of a PS but the CS is busy the caller hears busy tone Installation Manual References Installation Manual lt KX TDA100 KX TDA200 gt 2 8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 9 Connection of 2 4 GHz Portable Stations KX TDA100 KX TDA200 lt KX TDA30 gt 6 7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations KX TDA30 6 8 Connection of 2 4 GHz Portable Stations KX TDA30 216 Feature Guide 1 23 Portable Station PS Features 1 23 2 PS Ring Group Description PS ring gr
336. vacy Release Time Privacy is released for five seconds to allow the conversation to be joined e This feature overrides Data Line Security 1 10 5 Data Line Security and Executive Busy Override Deny 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation 138 Feature Guide 1 14 Paging Features 1 14 Paging Features 1 14 1 Paging Description An extension user can make a voice announcement to many people simultaneously The message is announced over the built in speakers of PT and or external speakers external pagers which belong to the paging group With the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 up to two external pagers can be connected with the KX TDA3O one external pager can be connected The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call Paging Deny It is possible to deny being paged on an extension basis Paging Group Each paging group consists of user groups and external pagers One user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups An extension can page the extension members and the external pagers of the same paging group only If any user group is not assigned but external pager s is assigned in a paging group any extension can page the external pager s in the paging group 2 2 2 Group Example Paging Grou
337. vated CONR becomes active automatically These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications CLIR COLR ETS 300 172 Circuit mode basis services CNIR CONR ETS 300 238 Name identification supplementary services Conditions e COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR Assignment for Each Port Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN QSIG port of the PBX e CLIR Button and COLR Button It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button Feature Guide References 1 18 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References User Manual 1 7 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Callers Telephone Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 7 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Callers Telephone Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR 1 7 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Feature Guide 1 27 Networking Features 1 27 3 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG Description The PBX forwards the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network The destination can be set on your own PBX on an extension basis as the forward destination of trunk calls gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD
338. ve a backup system data you have to set the PBX to the factory default and reprogramme it Therefore we recommend that you back up the system data 314 Feature Guide 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 PC Programming 3 2 1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console To programme and administer the PBX by personal computer PC you need to install the Maintenance Console KX TDA Maintenance Console for the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or KX TDASO Maintenance Console for the KX TDA30 onto the computer This section briefly describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are connected by USB cable The screenshots shown in the installation procedure are based on the KX TDA Maintenance Console System Requirements Operating System e Microsoft Windows 98 SE Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP Hardware e CPU Intel Pentium 133 MHz or better microprocessor e RAM at least 64 megabytes MB of free RAM 128 MB recommended e HDD at least 100 MB of hard disc space Feature Guide 315 3 2 PC Programming Installing the Maintenance Console and Selecting the Appropriate Country Area Data 1 a Save the setup file of the Maintenance Console on your PC b Double click the icon to execute the setup file C Follow the instructions of the wizard EE un E E 2 a Type the appropriate Country Code The Maintenance Console will be Hee Me 1 eg installed with the appropriate default examp
339. vel 629 gt Overflow Time 626 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 625 Destination When All Busy 627 Tenant number is required to determine the time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service and the music source for Music on Hold for each group gt gt 6 ON QO o A CQ N 40 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Calls arriving at incoming call distribution group 1 F Overflow Feature a Sends busy tone Busy on Busy or b Redirects to the overflow destination D Queuing Feature Five calls are waiting in a queue E Manual Queue Redirection 10 lete The longest waiting call in a queue can be redirected to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry up button The button shows the Hurry up status B Group Call Distribution Calls are distributed by the assigned method Only three extensions agents can answer the call for C Busy on Busy Extn Exn Extn Extn 101 102 103 104 105 A Incoming Call Log in Distribution Group 1 Floating extension no 290 Name Sales Q Supervisor Extension Extn 100 Monitors or controls the incoming call distribution group status Extn 105 Log out 12 10 s 1 2 2 3 Queuing Feature II gt 1 2 2 7 Supervisory Feature 12 s 1 2 2 6 Log in Log out 1 Group Call Distribution 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution
340. verified code 1 8 6 Verified Code Entry Shows the trunk number used for the call For patterns A and B 00 will be shown for trunk numbers over hundred Trunk Call Outgoing Trunk Call Shows the dialled telephone number Valid digits are as follows 0 through 9 P Pause F EFA signal A Host PBX Access code 1 5 4 7 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX dot Secret dialling X Privacy dial Transferred call If the transfer destination extension enters some digits the entered digits will be added after Incoming Trunk Call Shows lt I gt the caller s identification name number It is also possible to show the DDI DID MSN call information In this case lt D gt DDI DID MSN name number is added before lt I gt Outgoing Intercom Call Shows the dialled extension number followed by EXT Log in Log out Shows the log in or log out status Shows the ring duration before answering a call in Minutes Seconds Feature Guide 227 1 24 Administrative Information Output Features Number in the Description Pattern Shows the duration of the trunk call in Hours Minutes Seconds Shows the account code appended to the call 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry CD Shows other call information with the following codes Condition CL Collect call Code TR Transfer FW FWD to trunk DO Call using DISA or TIE line service RM Remote mainten
341. vice Features 180 Some supplementary services are provided by the key protocol 1 19 1 11 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Extension Number An extension number can be assigned to each ISDN port Network Type Each ISDN port can be set to the requirements of each country area BRI Network Type 420 For BRI only L1 Active Mode and L2 Data Link Mode The active mode of Layer 1 L1 gt BRI Layer 1 Active Mode 424 For BRI only and the data link mode of Layer 2 L2 BRI Layer 2 Active Mode 425 For BRI only can be selected individually Permanent or Call by Call on an ISDN port basis TEI Assignment Mode The Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI assignment mode can be selected on an ISDN port basis BHI TEI Mode 427 For BRI only Bearer Mode The bearer mode can be assigned on an extension basis Automatic ISDN Configuration ISDN BRI port configuration can be set automatically through system programming The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN BHI port L1 Active Mode L2 Data Link Mode Access Mode Point to Point Point to Multipoint TEI Assignment Mode Fix 00 63 Automatic Feature Guide References 1 27 3 QSIG Network Feature Guide 1 19 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 19 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Description
342. wing services individually for each ISDN QSIG port Service Table Calling Line sends the callers number to the QSIG network 1 27 3 2 Calling Identification when making a call Connected Line Presentation CLIP Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Connected Line Sends the number of the answered party to the Identification QSIG network when answering a call Presentation COLP Calling Line Prevents the caller s CLI being presented to the Identification Identification called party by the caller Presentation Restriction CLIR CNIP CONP by QSIG Connected Line Prevents COLP being sent by the answered Identification party Restriction COLR Feature Guide 263 1 27 Networking Features Seve Beas Calling Name sends the callers name to the QSIG network 1 27 3 2 Calling Identification when making a call Connected Line Presentation CNIP Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Calling Name Prevents the callers name being presented to Identification Identification the called party by the caller Presentation Restriction CNIR CNIP CONP by QSIG Connected Name Sends the name of the answered party to the Identification QSIG network when answering a call Presentation CONP Connected Name Prevents CONP being sent by the answered Identification party Restriction CONR Call Forwarding CF Forwards a call to the QSIG
343. wo ways each PT user can choose which through personal programming Live Call Screening Mode Set PS users cannot choose the way only Private mode is available for them Hands free mode The user can monitor the call automatically through the built in speaker Private mode The user will hear an alarm tone To monitor the call the user goes off hook with the handset MONITOR button or SP PHONE button However PS users cannot monitor the call with the speakerphone Two way Recording into the VPS A PT user can record a conversation into his own mailbox or another mailbox while talking on the phone 13 14 1 22 Voice Mail Features Use the Two way Record button to record into his own mailbox Use the Two way Transfer button to record into someone else s mailbox Note When you record Two way telephone conversations you should inform the other party that the conversation is being recorded VPS Data Control by the PBX The data of date and time is controlled by the PBX Remote PBX Data Control by the VPS The FWD of an extension can be controlled by the VPS This feature may not be supported depending on the software version of the VPS Conditions General Voice Mail VM Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail VM Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter Live Call Screening LCS If an SLT is connected in parallel to a PT
344. y or the seized trunk is busy it is possible to press the REDIAL button continuously until the called party or the trunk becomes idle There is no need to go off hook before pressing the REDIAL button Storing the Call Log Information in Personal Speed Dialling When storing the number and name from the call log into Personal Speed Dialling the Idle Line Access number is automatically attached to the telephone number 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button KX TDA30 only Pressing the REDIAL button on a display DPT while on hook can display the Outgoing Call Log System programming is required for this operation User Manual References User Manual Feature Guide 1 2 3 Redial 1 11 1 Using the Call Log 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Description An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialling to frequently dialled numbers which are stored in the PBX extension data or the PBX system data gt System Speed Dialling Number 001 Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling Conditions General Any number e g telephone number feature number can be stored in a speed dialling number A name can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialling number through personal programming and System Speed Dialling number gt System Speed Dialling Name 002 Call Directory Speed Dialling Display PT user

Model KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents